Hyundai Entourage Workshop Manual (V6-3.8L (2009) )

Factory Workshop Manual
Make
Hyundai
Model
Entourage
Engine and year
V6-3.8L (2009)
Please navigate through the PDF using the options

provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar.
This manual was submitted by

Anonymous
Date
1st January 2018
Hyundai Entourage Workshop Manual (V6-3.8L (2009))
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm
Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations
Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations
Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 10
Alarm Module: Service and Repair
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the crash pad. . 3. Disconnect the 5P
connector of the SMARTRA unit and then remove the SMARTRA unit (A) with bracket (B) located
on the cowl cross bar. after
loosening the shear bolt.
4. Installation is the reverse of removal procedure.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Entertainment System Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Parking Assist Control Module: Locations
Component Location
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Components and Components Location
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair Components and Components Location
Component Location
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Components and Components Location > Page 19
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair Repair Procedures
Replacement
1. Remove the right side trim of the trunk 2. Loosen the mounting bolts and remove the rear
parking assist control unit (A) from the quarter panel.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Door Module > Component
Information > Locations > Driver Door Module
Door Module: Locations Driver Door Module

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Door Module > Component
Information > Locations > Driver Door Module > Page 25
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module
> Component Information > Service and Repair > IMS (Integrated Memory System) module
Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair IMS (Integrated Memory System) module
Replacement
1. Remove the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the seats in the car.
3. Remove the IMS module (A) after loosening 4 nuts and 3 connectors in the bottom of seat.
4. Installation is the reverse of removal.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module
> Component Information > Service and Repair > IMS (Integrated Memory System) module > Page 30
Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair IMS Power Seat Control
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the seat back .
3. Remove the power seat module after removing the power seat module mounting nuts (4EA) and
connector (3EA).

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module
> Component Information > Locations > Driver Power Seat Module
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module
> Component Information > Locations > Driver Power Seat Module > Page 38
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Sliding Door Module
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Sliding Door Module: > 09-BE-001 >
Mar > 09 > Body - Sliding Door Reopens 6 Inches When Closing
Power Sliding Door Module: Customer Interest Body - Sliding Door Reopens 6 Inches When
Closing
Group: ELECTRICAL
Number:09-BE-001
Date: MARCH, 2009
Model: 2006 - 2008 ENTOURAGE
Subject: POWER SLIDING DOOR (PSD) CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
Some 2006 - 2008 Entourage models equipped with the Power Sliding Door (PSD) option may
exhibit a condition where a PSD reopens approximately 6 inches from the latch area while closing.
In those instances, the door ajar warning light will illuminate, along with all overhead interior
lighting. In some cases, it may also be possible that the door will not reopen but the door motor
continues to run for approximately 2 additional seconds after closing.
This bulletin provides the service procedure to replace the PSD modules to repair these conditions.
VEHICLES AFFECTED: Entourage vehicles with the Power Sliding Door option produced from
January 10, 2006 through October 2, 2007.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. If a vehicle experiences the power sliding door closing condition, replace BOTH PSD modules
with part number 95450-4D103 following the service procedure provided in the Entourage Service
Shop Manual under the Body Electrical (BE) section, Power Sliding Door System, Power Sliding
Door Module.
Mar > 09 > Body - Sliding Door Reopens 6 Inches When Closing > Page 47
NOTE:
There are two PSD modules, one for each PSD. They are located on each of the two PSD drive
units, behind the inner rear trim panel, above the rear inner wheel wells.
NOTE:
Both PSD modules share a common part number (95450-4D103) and are interchangeable.
RESETTING THE POWER SLIDING DOORS AFTER REPLACING THE PSD MODULES:
1. Make sure both PSD's are closed.
2. Turn OFF the ignition key.
3. Pull out (but do not remove) the shunt fuse in the IPM fuse panel located at the lower left side of
the steering wheel. Wait 30 seconds and then reinstall the shunt fuse.
4. On a level surface, use any power door input to completely open and close each PSD 3 times to
relearn the doors.
Mar > 09 > Body - Sliding Door Reopens 6 Inches When Closing > Page 48
5. Check each PSD for normal operation. Each PSD should operate smoothly and without
hesitation. Should either PSD not operate normally, recheck for any other possible conditions that
may affect normal operation.
6. If no other conditions are found and either PSD continues to exhibit the closing condition, contact
TechLine for assistance.
NOTE:
WHEN RETURNING THE VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER, REMIND THEM TO WAIT A FULL
FIVE SECONDS AFTER A CLOSING INPUT BEFORE PLACING THE VEHICLE INTO GEAR IN
ORDER FOR THE PSD TO CLOSE AND LATCH.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Sliding Door Module: >
09-BE-001 > Mar > 09 > Body - Sliding Door Reopens 6 Inches When Closing
Power Sliding Door Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Sliding Door Reopens 6 Inches
When Closing
Group: ELECTRICAL
Number:09-BE-001
Date: MARCH, 2009
DESCRIPTION:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Door Module.
09-BE-001 > Mar > 09 > Body - Sliding Door Reopens 6 Inches When Closing > Page 54
NOTE:
NOTE:
relearn the doors.
09-BE-001 > Mar > 09 > Body - Sliding Door Reopens 6 Inches When Closing > Page 55
NOTE:
> Component Information > Locations > Power Sliding Door Module LH
> Component Information > Locations > Power Sliding Door Module LH > Page 58
> Component Information > Locations > Page 59
Power Sliding Door Module: Service and Repair
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the rear trim panel 3. Remove the
connectors and mounting bolts (2EA) from the power sliding door unit(A). And then remove the
power sliding door control module
(B).
Tightening torque : 0.025 - 0.035 N.m (0.0025 - 0.0035 kg.m)
WARNING: -
A learn cycle must be performed whenever the power is removed.
- Check the normal operation whenever a power sliding door component is removed or replaced. If
the chime sound is heard, check the DTC, wiring harness and cable connections.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 63
Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Service and Repair
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the third, fourth seat 3. Remove the D
pillar and luggage side trim . 4. Use a small screw driver to loosen clip (A). But do not remove
power tailgate push rod (B).
5. Remove the power tail gate module mounting bolts (2EA) and connectors (2EA). And then
remove the power tail gate module (A).
Tightening torque : 0.025 - 0.035 N.m (0.0025 - 0.0035 kg.m)
6. Installation is the reverse of removal
NOTE: -
Connect the connectors tightly.
- Check the power tail gate for normal operation correctly.
WARNING: -
A lost drive unit mounting bolt in the vehicle may make a noise.
- Don't operate the power tail gate when a push rod is removed.
- A learn cycle must be performed whenever the power is removed.
- Check the normal operating whenever a power tailgate component is removed or replaced. If the
chime sound is heard, check the DTC, wiring harness and cable connections.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module
> Component Information > Service and Repair
Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the seat cushion (A)
3. Remove the seat heater module (B) after removing seat heater module mounting screw (2EA)
and connector from rear height motor (A).

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module
> Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Specifications
Electronic Brake Control Module: Specifications
Components
Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 74
Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views
Electronic Brake Control Module: Exploded Views
Components
Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 77
Electronic Brake Control Module: Connector Views

ABS HECU Connector
Sensor Output On Scan Tool(ABS)

Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
Electronic Brake Control Module: Testing and Inspection ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
ECU Connector Input/output(ABS)
ABS HECU Connector

Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) > Page 80
Electronic Brake Control Module: Testing and Inspection ESC(Electronic Stability Control) System
ESC HECU Connector Input / Output

ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Components and Components Location
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Components and Components Location
Components
Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Components and Components Location > Page 85
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Repair Procedures
Removal
1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Disconnect the brake tube from the HECU by unlocking the nuts
counterclockwise with a spanner.
3. Disconnect the connector(A) from the HECU.
4. Remove the two HECU brake mounting bolts(B) , and then disassemble the HECU with the
bracket.
CAUTION:
1. Never attempt to disassemble the HECU. 2. The HECU must be protected during storage and
transport, and must not be subjected to excessive shock.
5. Remove the two HECU mounting nuts (C) and washer, and then remove the bracket.
Installation
1. Installation is the reverse of removal. 2. Tighten the HECU mounting bolts and brake tube nuts to
the specified torque.
Tightening torque HECU mounting nut: 6 - 10 N.m (0.6 - 1.0 kgf.m, 4.34 - 7.23 lb-ft) HECU bracket
mounting bolt: 17 - 26 N.m (1.7 - 2.6 kgf.m, 12.3 - 18.8 lb-ft)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams
Traction Control Module: Diagrams

ABS HECU Connector

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control
Module > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Blower Motor Relay: Locations
Component Location
Information > Locations > Page 100
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
1. There should be continuity between the NO.1 in the A and NO.10 in the B terminals when power
and ground are connected to the NO.7 and
NO.13 in the A terminals. (Passenger compartment relay box)
2. There should be to no continuity between the NO.1 in the A and NO.10 in the B terminals when
power is disconnected.
Rear Blower
1. There should be continuity between the NO.4in the A and NO.12n the B terminals when power
and ground are connected to the NO.2and NO.14in
the A terminals. (Passenger compartment relay box)
2. There should be to no continuity between the NO.4in the A and NO.12in the B terminals when
power is disconnected.
Information > Service and Repair > Components and Components Location
Blower Motor Relay: Service and Repair Components and Components Location
Component Location
Information > Service and Repair > Components and Components Location > Page 103
Blower Motor Relay: Service and Repair Repair Procedures
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the crash pad center lower side cover. 3.
Loosen the relay box mounting nut, and then remove the relay box(A).
4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > BCM-IF
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > BCM-IF > Page 115
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Control Unit > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
1. The daytime running unit (A) is integrated in the IPM.
2. Functional diagram.
3. The DRL function operates the Head lamps High Beam at 50% of full illumination. The DRL
function is active if :
A. the engine is running B. the Head lamp multifunction switch is in OFF position or 'Park and Tail
lamp' (Auto light function deactivated) C. The Park break switch is OFF.
When the DRL function is active, the Head lamps High Beam can't be turned ON, except for the
Flash To Pass activation.
4. If the daytime running light is not operated well, Inspect the connector and terminals to be sure
they are all making good contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. If
the terminals look OK, go to step 4.
5. Make these input tests at the connector by using ETM.
If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. If all the input
tests prove OK, the IPM (In-panel module) must be faulty; replace it.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Specifications > Relay Box (Passenger Compartment)
Relay Box: Specifications Relay Box (Passenger Compartment)
Components
IPM (Instrument Panel Module)

Component Information > Specifications > Relay Box (Passenger Compartment) > Page 128
RAM (Rear Area Module)
Relay Box: Specifications Relay Box (Engine Compartment)
Components
FAM (Front Area Module)

Component Information > Specifications > Page 132
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Relay Box: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 135
1. Pages by system/Name of Schematic diagram
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
2. Connector configuration (components)
- The connector figure of components in the schematic diagram by system is indicated on the last
page of schematic diagram.
- It shows the front of the connector on the harness side when not to the harness connector. The
terminal number on each connector can be obtained by following the pattern used in (5) connector
view and numbering order. Unused terminals are marked with an asterisk (*).
3. Connector configurations (connection between harnesses)
- When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors and indicates them on the connector configurations group.
4. Component locations
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
5. Connector view and numbering order

NOTE: UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED, ALL CONNECTOR VIEWS ARE FROM THE TERMINAL
SIDE OF THE CONNECTOR.
6. Wire color abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
It depends on vehicles, it is necessary to check the harness name symbol on the harness layouts
for detailed symbol.
8. Connector Identification
A Connector identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol

corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector. These
connector locations can be found in the HARNESS LAYOUTS.
For example
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example
Junction Block Identification
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Relay Box: Diagnostic Aids
Basic Inspection Procedure
Measuring Condition of Electronic Parts' Resistance The measured resistance at high temperature
after vehicle running may be high or low. So all resistance must be measured at ambient
temperature (20°C, 68°F), unless stated otherwise.
NOTE:
The measured resistance in except for ambient temperature (20°C, 68°F) is reference value.
Intermittent Problem Inspection Procedure Sometimes the most difficult case in troubleshooting is
when a problem symptom occurs but does not occur again during testing. An example would be if a
problem appears only when the vehicle is cold but has not appeared when warm. In this case, the
technician should thoroughly make out a "Customer Problem Analysis Sheet" and recreate
(simulate) the environment and condition which occurred when the vehicle was having the issue.
1. Clear Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). 2. Inspect connector connection, and check terminal for
poor connections, loose wires, bent, broken or corroded pins, and then verify that the
connectors are always securely fastened.
3. Slightly shake the connector and wiring harness vertically and horizontally. 4. Repair or replace
the component that has a problem. 5. Verify that the problem has disappeared with the road test.
Simulating Vibration
1) Sensors and Actuators : Slightly vibrate sensors, actuators or relays with finger.
WARNING: Strong vibration may break sensors, actuators or relays

2) Connectors and Harness : Lightly shake the connector and wiring harness vertically and then
horizontally.
Simulating Heat
1) Heat components suspected of causing the malfunction with a hair dryer or other heat source.
WARNING: -
DO NOT heat components to the point where they may be damaged.
- DO NOT heat the ECM directly.
Simulating Water Sprinkling
1) Sprinkle water onto vehicle to simulate a rainy day or a high humidity condition.
WARNING: DO NOT sprinkle water directly into the engine compartment or electronic components.
Simulating Electrical Load
1) Turn on all electrical systems to simulate excessive electrical loads (Radios, fans, lights, rear
window defogger, etc.).
Connector Inspection Procedure
1. Handling of Connector
A. Never pull on the wiring harness when disconnecting connectors.
B. When removing the connector with a lock, press or pull locking lever.
C. Listen for a click when locking connectors. This sound indicates that they are securely locked.
D. When a tester is used to check for continuity, or to measure voltage, always insert tester probe
from wire harness side.
E. Check waterproof connector terminals from the connector side. Waterproof connectors cannot
be accessed from harness side.
NOTE: -
Use a fine wire to prevent damage to the terminal.
- Do not damage the terminal when inserting the tester lead.

2. Checking Point for Connector
A. While the connector is connected:
Hold the connector, check connecting condition and locking efficiency.
B. When the connector is disconnected:
Check missed terminal, crimped terminal or broken core wire by slightly pulling the wire harness.
Visually check for rust, contamination, deformation and bend.
C. Check terminal tightening condition:
Insert a spare male terminal into a female terminal, and then check terminal tightening conditions.
D. Pull lightly on individual wires to ensure that each wire is secured in the terminal.
3. Repair Method of Connector Terminal
A. Clean the contact points using air gun and/or shop rag.
NOTE: Never use sand paper when polishing the contact points, otherwise the contact point may
be damaged.
B. In case of abnormal contact pressure, replace the female terminal.
Wire Harness Inspection Procedure
1. Before removing the wire harness, check the wire harness position and crimping in order to
restore it correctly. 2. Check whether the wire harness is twisted, pulled or loosened. 3. Check
whether the temperature of the wire harness is abnormally high. 4. Check whether the wire harness
is rotating, moving or vibrating against the sharp edge of a part. 5. Check the connection between
the wire harness and any installed part. 6. If the covering of wire harness is damaged; secure,
repair or replace the harness.
Electrical Circuit Inspection Procedure
X Check Open Circuit
1. Procedures for Open Circuit
A. Continuity Check B. Voltage Check If an open circuit occurs (as seen in [FIG. 1]), it can be found
by performing Step 2 (Continuity Check Method) or Step 3 (Voltage Check Method) as shown
below.
2. Continuity Check Method
NOTE: When measuring for resistance, lightly shake the wire harness above and below or from
side to side.
Specification (Resistance) 1Ohms or less -> Normal Circuit 1MOhms or Higher -> Open Circuit
A. Disconnect connectors (A), (C) and measure resistance between connector (A) and (C) as
shown in [FIG. 2].
In [FIG.2.] the measured resistance of line 1 and 2 is higher than 1MOhms and below 1 Ohms
respectively. Specifically the open circuit is line 1 (Line 2 is normal). To find exact break point,
check sub line of line 1 as described in next step.
B. Disconnect connector (B), and measure for resistance between connector (C) and (B1) and
between (B2) and (A) as shown in [FIG. 3].
In this case the measured resistance between connector (C) and (B1) is higher than 1MOhms and
the open circuit is between terminal 1 of connector (C) and terminal 1 of connector (B1).
3. Voltage Check Method
A. With each connector still connected, measure the voltage between the chassis ground and
terminal 1 of each connectors (A), (B) and (C) as
shown in [FIG. 4].
The measured voltage of each connector is 5V, 5V and 0V respectively. So the open circuit is
between connector (C) and (B).
Check Short Circuit
1. Test Method for Short to Ground Circuit
A. Continuity Check with Chassis Ground If short to ground circuit occurs as shown in [FIG. 5], the
broken point can be found by performing Step 2 (Continuity Check Method with Chassis Ground)
as shown below.
2. Continuity Check Method (with Chassis Ground)
NOTE: Lightly shake the wire harness above and below, or from side to side when measuring the
resistance.
Specification (Resistance)
1Ohms or less -> Short to Ground Circuit 1MOhms or Higher -> Normal Circuit
A. Disconnect connectors (A), (C) and measure for resistance between connector (A) and Chassis
Ground as shown in [FIG. 6].
The measured resistance of line 1 and 2 in this example is below 1 Ohms and higher than
1MOhms respectively. Specifically the short to ground circuit is line 1 (Line 2 is normal). To find
exact broken point, check the sub line of line 1 as described in the following step.
B. Disconnect connector (B), and measure the resistance between connector (A) and chassis
ground, and between (B1) and chassis ground as
shown in [FIG. 7].
The measured resistance between connector (B1) and chassis ground is 1Ohms or less. The short
to ground circuit is between terminal 1 of connector (C) and terminal 1 of connector (B1).
Testing For Voltage Drop
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
1) Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. 2) Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire. (or the
other side of the connector or switch) 3) Operate the circuit. 4) The voltmeter will show the
difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in
5V circuits),
may indicate a problem. Check the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Troubleshooting Procedures
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
The following five-step troubleshooting procedure is recommended.
1. Verify the customer's complaints

Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
2. Read and analyze the schematic diagram
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
3. Inspect the circuit/component with the problem isolated
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
4. Repair the problem
Once the problem is found, make the necessary repairs.
5. Make sure the circuit works
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
VOLTMETER AND TEST LAMP
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid-state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control Module
(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be tested
only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on circuits
that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
SELF-POWERED TEST LAMP AND OHMMETER
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a self-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading.
If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.

JUMPER WIRE WITH FUSE
Use a jumper wire with a fuse to by-pass an open circuit.
A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. This tool is
available with small clamp connectors providing adaption to most connectors without damage.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder created a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short trough body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
1. TESTING FOR VOLTAGE
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back (backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point (connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
specification indicates a problem.
2. TESTING FOR CONTINUITY
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or
ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to test. If you are using an ohmmeter,
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
3. TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp of an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches part) while watching the
self-powered test lamp or ohmmeter.
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter register, there is a short to a ground in the
wiring near that point.
4. TESTING FOR A SHORT WITH A SHORT FINDER
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
fuse box and the short.
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
Relay Box: Electrical Diagrams
Relay Box (Engine Compartment)
Components

Relay Box (Passenger Compartment)
Components

Component Information > Diagrams > Page 152
Relay Box: Application and ID
Fuse & Relay Information
Front Area Module (FAM) Layout View

Front Area Module (FAM) Layout Circuit Details


Instrument Panel Module (IPM) Layout View

Instrument Panel Module (IPM) Layout Circuit Details


Rear Area Module (RAM) Layout View

Rear Area Module (RAM) Layout Circuit Details

Relay Box: Description and Operation
Description
The ICM (Integrated circuit module) relay (A) is united with many kinds of relays and installed side
of the in-panel module.
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay Box (Engine Compartment)
Relay Box: Testing and Inspection Relay Box (Engine Compartment)
Inspection
Fuse
1. Be sure there is no play in the fuse holders, and that the fuses are held securely. 2. Are the fuse
capacities for each circuit correct? 3. Are there any blown fuses?
If a fuse is to be replaced, be sure to use a new fuse of the same capacity. Always determine why
the fuse blew first and completely eliminate the problem before installing a new fuse.
Relay
1. Be sure that the relays are held the each module securely. 2. Are the relay types for each circuit
correct?
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay Box (Engine Compartment) > Page 163
3. If system of some relay is not operate accurately, replace with a new one and check the system.
Relay Box: Testing and Inspection Relay Box (Passenger Compartment)
Inspection
Fuse
Relay
correct?
Relay Box: Testing and Inspection ICM (Integrated Circuit Module) Relay Box
Inspection
Front Blower
Check for continuity between the terminals.
1. There should be continuity between the No.1 in the ICM-A and No.10 in the ICM-B terminals
when power and ground are connected to the No.7
in the ICM-A and No.13 terminals in the ICM-B terminals.
2. There should be no continuity between the No.1 in the ICM-A and No.10 terminals in the ICM-B
terminals when power is disconnected.
Rear Blower
2. There should be no continuity between the No.4 in the ICM-A and No.12 in the ICM-B terminals
when power is disconnected.
Seat Heater Relays
1. There should be continuity between the No.9 and No.6 terminals when power and ground are
connected to the No.7 and No.8 terminals in the
ICM-B.
2. There should be no continuity between the No.9 and No.6 terminals when power is
disconnected.
Key Interlock
ICM-B.
disconnected.
Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Box (Engine Compartment)
Relay Box: Service and Repair Relay Box (Engine Compartment)
Components and Components Location
Components

Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Box (Engine Compartment) > Page 168
Repair Procedures
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the FAM cover of engine room. 3.
Remove the FAM connectors (2EA) (A) and battery terminal nut (1EA) (B).
4. Remove FAM mounting bolts (3EA) (A) and remove the FAM (B) from splash shield (C).
5. Disconnect the connector from splash shield. 6. Installation is the reverse of removal.
Relay Box: Service and Repair Relay Box (Passenger Compartment)
Components

Repair Procedures
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the crash pad lower panel (A). .
3. Disconnect the receiver antenna cable and connectors (5EA). Remove IPM mounting nuts (3EA)
and IPM (A).
4. Installation is the reverse of removal procedures.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Body Control Module: Locations
- Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions
Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Instructions > Page 179
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Body Control Module: Connector Views
Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
Communication Diagram
Door Control Module

Door Control Module (1)


Door Control Module Connector Pin Outs
Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be
found via the photo number at the vehicle level under Locations by Photo Number. See:
Locations/Component Locations
Connector Views: The Connector Pin Out Views for connectors shown on these diagrams can be
found on the Connector Pin Out images that follow most sets of system diagrams.
Power Sliding Door Module LH

Power Sliding Door Module LH (1)


Power Sliding Door Module LH Connector Pin Outs
Power Sliding Door Module RH

Power Sliding Door Module RH (1)


Power Sliding Door Module RH Connector Pin Outs
Power Tail Gate Module

Power Tail Gate Module (1)


Power Tail Gate Module Connector Pin Outs
- Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Assist
Door Module (ADM)
Body Control Module: Description and Operation Assist Door Module (ADM)
Description
The assist door module is a part of CAN, and performs CAN communication with the BCM, FAM,
IPM, RAM, DDM, and IMS. The driver can control the power window, mirror, door(lock/unlock) by
using buttons of the ADM on the door of the driver's seat.
1. Operating the power window by buttons 2. Central Door LOCK/UNLOCK function 3. Manually
operating the mirror position by the manual SW (Up, Down, Right, and Left) 4. Saving and
replacing the mirror position by the memory switch -> For 2 persons 5. Out side mirror AUTO
reverse operation 6. Door courtesy lamp control 7. Out side mirror defog control 8. Illumination
control
Control Function
Power Window Control
1. This switch controls power window up/down from assist side.
A. According to the input of assist Door module window, up/down switch, output window motor
up/down. B. Power window up/down control from assist side.
2. Timer function
Power window switch can be controlled for 30 seconds after the ignition is turned off. This function
stops immediately even within 30 seconds if the front door is opened.
Crash Unlock
1. Under the condition "IGN ON", if Crash Sensor message from IPM is ON, Door UNLOCK is
output.(5 ± 0.5sec)
Auto Door Lock
1. If the vehicle is under any of the following conditions and the condition lasts for 3sec, all doors is
locked.
If message from IPM is "Door Lock Control = LOCK ALL", it will be locked for 0.5sec. A. IGN "RUN"
or "START" B. ALT L ON (Engine is running) C. Speed of the vehicle is 40Km/h D. If any door is on
"UNLOCK"
2. After LOCK output, if any door is not locked, there will be a series of three Lock output every
0.5sec. 3. If all doors are locked during a series of three output signals, output will be stopped. 4. If
any door is not locked after a series of three output signals, output will be stopped.
Key Reminder
1. If door is locked by using door lock knob after opening door while IGN KEY is inserted to KEY
CYLINDER, Unlock output will be for 1sec and
there will be a series of three output signals every 0.5sec if door condition is "Lock".
2. If Key Reminder unlock message is "SHORT UNLOCK", DOOR UNLOCK lasts for 0.5sec. 3. If
Key Reminder unlock message is "LONG UNLOCK", DOOR UNLOCK lasts for 1sec. 4. Remained
action goes on though Key Reminder Unlock message changes to "OFF".
Priority Of Door Lock/unlock
1. Crash Unlock > Auto Door Lock > Key Reminder > Central Door Lock 2. Higher priority signals
take precedence, and will override lower priority signals. 3. If the priority is the same or low, it'll be
ignored.
Out Side Mirror Fold/unfold Power Control
1. Supply folding power for 30sec after ACC ON or ACC OFF. 2. FOLD/UNFOLD operation is
controlled by fold switch.
Out Side Mirror Control By The Switch
1. Manual control of left outside mirror
If the mirror direction switch (up, down, left and right) is pressed when mirror selection switch on
driver side power window switch is in outside LH under ACC ON condition, then mirror motor
moves to the corresponding direction.
2. Manual control of right outside mirror
driver side power window switch is in outside RH under ACC ON condition, then operating signal is
sent to passenger side power window switch through CAN communication.
Door Module (ADM) > Page 210
Outside Mirror Memory Operation By The Memory Switch
1. IMS Message from DDM is sent to RETURN1 or RETURN2, out side mirror returns to the
position stored. 2. Memory permit status is released if any of the following conditions is met
A. If 5 seconds is elapsed after the memory switch is turned on B. If the ignition 2 is turned off C.
When saving is completed D. If Ignition switch of the CAN communication data sent by the IPM is
not "Run" or "Start". E. If Inhibit switch of the CAN communication data sent by the FAM is not "P".
F. If vehicle speed of the CAN communication data sent by the cluster is "3Km/h" or more.
3. Memory is cleared if the battery is removed
Outside Mirror Memory And Replay Operation By The Memory Switch
1. IMS message from DDM is sent to RETURN1 or RETURN2, O/S MIRROR returns to the
position stored. 2. Replacing not stored position doesn't work. 3. If RETURN Message is sent
during replacing, the last Message has priority. 4. Replacing Prohibition Conditions.
(1) If the mirror switch on the LH side is pressed (2) If Ignition switch of the CAN communication
data sent by the IPM is not "Run". (3) If Inhibit switch of the CAN communication data sent by the
FAM is not "P". (4) If vehicle speed of the CAN communication data sent by the CLUSTER is
"3Km/h".
Outside Mirror Memory And Replay Operation By Keyless
1. Memory operation
A. If the ignition is turned off after being on, the position of the O/S mirror RH is saved in the switch
ASSY power window main. B. If the door was keyless-locked, the outside mirror RH position is
saved corresponding to the keyless code.
2. Replay operation
A. If the door is keyless-unlocked while the IGN SW is off, replacing is made to the saved position
corresponding to the keyless code.
3. Replay prohibit condition

A. When the inhibit "P" switch is OFF B. When RH side mirror switch is pressed C. When mirror
switch is pressed after ignition on D. When the vehicle speed is over 3km/h
Auto Reverse Function
Fail Safe Function
1. If the sensor does not move more than 60mV for the input changes (5 second operation) of the
position sensor although the motor is operating, it
will be considered there is a harness cutting, motor breakdown, or sensor breakdown and
automatic control will stop.
2. The mirror operation signal cannot be displayed into the same direction for more than 15
seconds. (When the mirror is replacing to the saved
position or the switch is manually pressed)
3. Monitoring the replacing time
A. If the replacing operation does not stop within 40 seconds, the mirror motor will not outputted
and the replacing operation will stop.
Courtesy Lamp
1. If assist's door is opened, RAM changes door open Message to ON and Courtesy lamp is ON by
ADM. 2. If assist's door is closed, RAM changes door open Message to Off and Courtesy lamp is
OFF gradually by ADM.(5±0.5sec) 3. During dim out, If IGN changes to ON or door is closed while
Ignition switch is ON, Courtesy lamp is OFF immediately. 4. If Key reminder switch is OFF and
door is opened for 20min, Courtesy lamp is OFF immediately.
Defog Control (O/s Mirror Heat Line)

If rear defog switch is on while IGN is ON, rear defog control of IPM is ON and O/S Mirror Defog is
ON by DDM, ADM.
Rescue Mode
1. The condition to run RESCUE MODE is listed below.
A. Ignition switch Message is in RUN or IGN switch is ON. B. Any signal received from of park tail
head lamp, front wiper control message is received as INVALID or CAN line from IPM is not
normal. C. Drive door courtesy lamp control message is sent as INVALID or Can Line from RAM is
not normal.
2. If RESCUE MODE runs, operation is as follows.
A. Door unlock is ON for 0.5sec B. OSRVM Defogger is ON for 20min. C. Illumination is ON

continuously. D. Other functions are the same as NORMAL mode.
3. If Ignition switch Message is OFF/ACC or IGN switch is OFF or can line from IPM,FAM,RAM is
normal, Rescue mode is stopped.
Body Control Module: Description and Operation Driver Door Module (DDM)
Description
The driver door module is a part of a Controller Area Network (CAN), and performs CAN
communication with the BCM, FAM, IPM, RAM, ADM, and IMS. Driver controls driver side power
window switch button located inside of the driver side door to operate power window, mirror, door
lock and unlock.
1. Two manual operations (up and down) for four p/windows. However, on the driver's seat the
auto up/down operation must be possible. 2. Opening and closing the quarter glass by the quarter
glass switch. 3. Window UP/DOWN operation by RKE. 4. Manually operating the mirror position by
the manual switch (Up, Down, Right, and Left) 5. Saving and replacing the mirror position by the
MEMORY switch -> For 2 persons 6. Saving and replacing the mirror position by RKE -> For 2
persons 7. Out side mirror AUTO reverse operation 8. Out side mirror FOLD/UNFOLD power
control 9. CENTRAL DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK function
10. DOOR COURTESY LAMP control 11. Out side mirror DEFOG control 12. Illumination control
Control Function
1. This switch controls power window up/down, automatic up/down from driver & assist side.
A. Driver's power window switch sends input signal through CAN communication by the manual
up/down and automatic up/down switch input.
At the same time passenger side sends manual up/down and automatic up/down signals to the
wires.
B. Each safety window ECU receives the signal and performs manual up/down and automatic
up/down functions.
2. Power window lock
When the driver's power window lock switch is ON, each safety window ECU receives the power
window lock command to prohibit the operation by the passenger side doors except the driver's
door.
3. Timer function
Key Reminder
ignored.
1. If the mirror direction switch (up, down, left and right) is pressed when mirror selection switch on
driver side power window switch is in outside
LH(RH) under ACC ON condition, then mirror motor moves to the corresponding direction.
1. If position switch (POS1 or POS2) is pressed within 5 seconds after pressing the memory switch
under ignition 2 on, it registers current mirror
position. (Switch module sends in LIN communication). (Memory permit status lasts for 5 seconds
after memory switch ON. After 5 seconds, memory permits status terminates. In other words,
current position is registered if the position switch (POS1 or POS2) is turned on, during the memory
permit status). However, RH side mirror position is not registered during the LH side mirror manual
switch operation.
2. Memory permit status is released if any of the following conditions is met
3. Memory is cleared if the battery is removed.

1. Memory operation
A. Outside mirror LH position is registered in the driver side power window switch when the ignition
is turned off from on. B. When door is locked by the keyless, outside mirror position is registered
corresponding to the keyless code. C. Data related to the memory operation is received from BCM
in CAN communication.
2. Replay operation
A. When door is unlocked by the keyless under ignition off state, it replays the position
corresponding to the keyless code. B. Data related to the replay operation is received from BCM in
CAN communication on CAN line.
A. If the mirror switch on the LH side is pressed B. If Ignition switch of the CAN communication
data sent by the IPM is not "Run" or "Start". C. If Inhibit switch of the CAN communication data sent
by the FAM is not "P". D. If vehicle speed of the CAN communication data sent by the CLUSTER is
"3Km/h" or more.
1. Memory operation
2. Replay operation

A. When the inhibit "P" switch is OFF. B. When RH side mirror switch is pressed. C. When mirror
switch is pressed after ignition on. D. When the vehicle speed is over 3km/h
Fail Safe Function
position sensor although the motor is operating,
IMS Switch
1. If it's satisfied with the followings
(1) Can communication Data ignition switch sent by IPM is "RUN" (2) Can communication Data
Inhibit switch sent by FAM is "P" (3) Can communication Data vehicle speed sent by CLUSTER is
under "3Km/h"
2. If SET switch is ON, IMS message is SET. 3. If POSITION switch is ON within 5sec since SET
switch is ON, IMS message will be sent to MEMORY1 or MEMORY2.
Seat Manual Switch
If Seat switch is controlled, seat control message is sent to seat.

Courtesy Lamp
1. If driver's door is opened, RAM changes door open Message to ON and Courtesy lamp is ON by
DDM. 2. If driver's door is closed, RAM changes door open Message to Off and Courtesy lamp is
OFF gradually by DDM.(5±0.5sec) 3. During dim out, If IGN changes to ON or door is closed while
Fuel Filler Door Open
When the fuel filler door open switch is turned on, this data is uploaded to the bus through CAN
communication.
ON by DDM,ADM.
Rescue Mode
not normal

- Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Assist Door
Module(ADM)
Body Control Module: Service and Repair Assist Door Module(ADM)
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the front door lower panel 3. Remove
the door module (A) mounting screws (5EA) after disconnecting module connector (3EA)
4. Remove the door module (DDM/ADM) (A) from the front door trim panel.
Module(ADM) > Page 217
Body Control Module: Service and Repair IPM (In-Panel Module)
Replacement
IPM (In-Panel Module)
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the crash pad lower panel (A).
3. Remove the keyless antenna cable and IPM(Instrument Panel Module)(A) after loosening 3 nuts
and disconnecting 5 connectors.

Body Control Module: Service and Repair FAM (Front Area Module)
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the FAM cover from the engine room. 3.
Remove the 2 FAM connectors(A) and battery terminal nut(B).
4. Remove the IPM(B) from the splash shield(C) after loosening the 3 IPM mounting bolts(A) and
the IPM mounting clip.
5. Disconnect the connector from the splash shield. 6. Installation is the reverse of removal.
Body Control Module: Service and Repair RAM (Rear Area Module)
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the left luggage side trim
3. Remove the RAM(A) after loosening the 7 connectors and the 3 RAM mounting bolts(A).

- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Engine Control Module: Locations
Component Location
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 223
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
and Instructions > Page 226
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Engine Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
1. PCM HARNESS CONNECTOR
2. PCM TERMINAL FUNCTION
Connector [C01-1]
Connector [C01-2]
3. PCM TERMINAL INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL
Connector [C01-1]
Connector [C01-2]
Circuit Diagram
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 256
Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection
PCM Problem Inspection Procedure
1. TEST PCM GROUND CIRCUIT: Measure resistance between PCM and chassis ground using
the backside of PCM harness connector as PCM
side check point. If the problem is found, repair it.
Specification (Resistance): 1Ohms or less
2. TEST PCM CONNECTOR: Disconnect the PCM connector and visually check the ground
terminals on PCM side and harness side for bent pins
or poor contact pressure. If the problem is found, repair it.
3. If problem is not found in Step 1 and 2, the PCM could be faulty. If so, replace the PCM with a
new one, and then check the vehicle again. If the
vehicle operates normally then the problem was likely with the PCM.
4. RE-TEST THE ORIGINAL PCM : Install the original PCM (may be broken) into a known-good
vehicle and check the vehicle. If the problem
occurs again, replace the original PCM with a new one. If problem does not occur, this is
intermittent problem .
- Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations
Component Location
- Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 260
- Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations
Component Location
- Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 265
- Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Component Location
- Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 269
- Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Air Bag Control Module: Locations
Components
Component Information > Description and Operation > Airbag Module
Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation Airbag Module
Airbag Disposal
Special tool required
Before scrapping any airbags or side airbags (including those in a whole vehicle to be scrapped),
the airbags or side airbags must be deployed. If the vehicle is still within the warranty period, before
deploying the airbags or side airbags, the Technical Manager must give approval and/or special
instruction. Only after the airbags or side airbags have been deployed (as the result of vehicle
collision, for example), can they be scrapped. If the airbags or side airbags appear intact (not
deployed), treat them with extreme caution. Follow this procedure.
Deploying airbags in the vehicle
If an SRS equipped vehicle is to be entirely scrapped, its airbags or side airbags should be
deployed while still in the vehicle. The airbags or side airbags should not be considered as
salvageable parts and should never be installed in another vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the battery negative cable and wait at least three
minutes. 2. Confirm that each airbag or side airbag is securely mounted. 3. Confirm that the special
tool is functioning properly by following the check procedure.
(1) Driver's Airbag :
A. Remove the driver's airbag and install the SST(0957A-38510). B. Install the driver's airbag on
the steering wheel.
(2) Front Passenger's Airbag :
A. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the 2P connector between the front passenger's airbag
and SRS main harness. B. Install the SST(0957A-2E110).
(3) Side Airbag :
A. Disconnect the 2P connector between the side airbag and side wire harness. B. Install the SST
(0957A-3F100).
(4) Curtain Airbag :

A. Disconnect the 2P connector between the curtain airbag and wire harness. B. Install the
SST(0957A-38500).
(5) Seat Belt Pretensioner :
A. Disconnect the 2P connector from the seat belt pretensioner. B. Install the SST(0957A-38500).
4. Place the deployment tool at least thirty feet (10 meters) away from the airbag. 5. Connect a 12
volt battery to the tool. 6. Push the tool's deployment switch. The airbag should deploy (deployment
is both highly audible and visible: a loud noise and rapid inflation of the
bag, followed by slow deflection)
7. Dispose of the complete airbag. No part of it can be reused. Place it in a sturdy plastic bag and
seal it securely.
Deploying the airbag out of the vehicle
If an intact airbag has been removed from a scrapped vehicle, or has been found defective or
damage during transit, storage or service, it should be deployed as follows :
1. Position the airbag face up, outdoors on flat ground at least thirty feet (10meters) from any
obstacles or people.
Disposal of damaged airbag
1. If installed in a vehicle, follow the removal procedure of driver's airbag front passenger's and side
airbag. 2. In all cases, make a short circuit by twisting together the two airbag inflator wires. 3.
Package the airbag in exactly the same packing that the new replacement part come in.
Component Information > Description and Operation > Airbag Module > Page 280
Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation SRS Control Module (SRSCM)
Description
The primary purpose of the SRSCM (Supplemental Restraint System Control Module) is to
discriminate between an event that warrants restraint system deployment and an event that does
not. The SRSCM must decide whether to deploy the restraint system or not. After determining that
pretensioners and/or airbag deployment is required, the SRSCM must supply sufficient power to
the pretensioners and airbag igniters to initiate deployment. The SRSCM determines that an impact
may require deployment of the pretensioners and airbags from data obtained from impact sensors
and other components in conjunction with a safing function. The SRSCM will not be ready to detect
a crash or to activate the restraint system devices until the signals in the SRSCM circuitry stabilize.
It is possible that the SRSCM could activate the safety restraint devices in approximately 2
seconds but is guaranteed to fully function after prove-out is completed. The SRSCM must perform
a diagnostic routine and light a system readiness indicator at key-on. The system must perform a
continuous diagnostic routine and provide fault annunciation through a warning lamp indicator in
the event of fault detection. A serial diagnostic communication interface will be used to facilitate
servicing of the restraint control system.
Component Information > Service and Repair > Components and Components Location
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Components and Components Location
Components
Component Information > Service and Repair > Components and Components Location > Page 283
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Repair Procedures

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative (-) cable from battery and wait for at least three minutes. 2. Remove
ignition key from the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the DAB, PAB, SAB, CAB and BPT connectors. 4.
Remove the floor console and heater ducts. 5. Press the lock(1), then pull back the connector
lever(2) until it clicks.
6. Disconnect the SRSCM harness connector(A) and (B) from the SRSCM. 7. Remove the SRSCM
mounting bolt (A) and nuts (B) from the SRSCM, then remove the SRSCM.
Installation
1. Disconnect the negative (-) cable from battery and wait for at least three minutes. 2. Remove
ignition key from the vehicle. 3. Install the SRSCM with the SRSCM mounting bolt and nuts.
Tightening Torque : 1.0 - 1.4 kgf.m (9.5 - 13.6 Nm, 7.0 - 10.0 lb.ft)
4. Connect the SRSCM harness connector.
5. Install the heater ducts and floor console. 6. Connect the DAB, PAB, SAB, CAB and BPT
connectors. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 8. After installing the SRSCM, confirm proper
system operation:
A. Turn the ignition switch ON; the SRS indicator light should be turned on for about six seconds
and then go off.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 288
Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
1. Remove the fuse box cover. 2. Remove the starter relay (A).
3. Using an ohmmeter, check that there is continuity between each terminal.
4. Apply 12V to terminal 85 and ground to terminal 86.
Check for continuity between terminals 30 and 87.
5. If there is no continuity, replace the starter relay. 6. Install the starter relay. 7. Install the fuse box
cover.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Locations
Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 294
Tire Pressure Module: Description and Operation
Description
Receiver
1. Mode
(1) Virgin State (No TPMS sensor id's learned)
A. The receiver as a sole part is shipped in this state. Replacement parts should therefore arrive in
this state. B. In this state, there is no sensor monitoring and no DTC monitoring. C. The state
indicates that platform specific parameters must be written to the receiver and that sensors are
un-learned. D. In unlearned state when connected in the vehicle with ignition key on the TPMS
lamp will flash at one second intervals.
(2) Normal State
A. In order for tire inflation state and DTC monitoring to occur, the receiver must be in this state. B.
In this state type 1, 2, or 3 sensor learning mode can be started.
2. Overview
A. Receives RF data from sensor. B. Uses sensor data to decide whether to turn on TREAD Lamp.
C. Uses sensor information, background noise levels, Auto-learn status, short circuit output status,
vehicle battery level, internal receiver states to
determine if there is a system or a vehicle fault.
LFI(Low Frequency Initiator)
1. Overview
A. Only High Line systems are fitted with an LFI. B. The LFI is located in the wheel well of each tire,
to enable the receiver to determine the vehicle position of each TPMS sensor for which it has
a stored TPMS sensor ID code.
C. When first turned on, the receiver activates the LFI's to wake up the TPMS sensors and get
wheel status. D. The LFI's are activated every 10 minutes to keep the TPMS sensors awake while
the key is on.
2. Operating mode
A. When triggered by the receiver the LFI broadcasts a 125 KHz signal through the tire to the
TPMS sensors to wake them up. B. After broadcasting the LFI returns to sleep mode until triggered
again by the receiver. C. Once the TPMS sensor has received the 125 KHz wake up signal, it
broadcasts it's ID and status. This information plus which LFI triggered it
allows the receiver to record which tire has which sensor.
Operation
1. Type 1 learn mode
A. TPMS sensor learning via K-line diagnostic bus using TPMS Exciter.
A. Learn via LFI wand B. Enter type 2 learn mode via K-line command. C. Trigger each TPMS
sensor in the following order FL,FR,RL,RR with the LFI wand. D. Exit type II learn mode.
Tire Pressure Module: Service and Repair
Replacement
NOTE:
When the receiver first arrives for replacement:

1) It will be in Virgin State. 2) It will not be configured for any specific platform. 3) It will not have
any sensor ID's memorized.
CAUTION:
It is important to make sure that the correct receiver is used to replace the malfunctioning part i.e.
Low line : 95800-3L500, High Line : 95800-4D100 in order to have the correct inflation warning
thresholds set.
1. Disconnect vehicle battery. 2. Remove malfunctioning part and fit bracket assembly to new part.
[Receiver]
3. Secure new part to vehicle and fit connector. 4. Re-connect battery and turn Ignition on. 5.
Check that TPMS lamp flash rate matches Virgin State indication. 6. Connect 'TPMS exciter' to the
diagnostic connector.
STACK:
Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation
Description
Receiver
1. Mode
(2) Normal State
2. Overview
1. Overview
Operation > Page 301
the key is on.
2. Operating mode
Operation
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair
Replacement
NOTE:

CAUTION:
thresholds set.
[Receiver]
7. Write vehicle name to receiver. receiver will now automatically update monitoring parameters.
8. Read sensor's ids with the 'TPMS exciter'. 9. Register sensor's ids to receiver.
10. Register VIN number of the vehicle.(17 digits)
11. Change receiver state from Virgin to Normal.

12. Disconnect diagnostic link. 13. Turn ignition off for approximately 10 seconds then turn it back
on and check that Normal State is now indicated.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-BE-026
> Sep > 09 > Antitheft System - Alarm System Self-Activates
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Customer Interest Antitheft System - Alarm System
Self-Activates
Group BODY
Number 09-BE-026
Date SEPTEMBER, 2009
Model GENESIS(BH) GENESIS(BK) TIBURON(GK) SONATA(NF) TUCSON(JM)

ENTOURAGE(EP) ELANTRA(HD)
Subject ALARM SELF ACTIVATES - HOOD SWITCH PAD REPLACEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
The vehicle alarm system may intermittently sound due to light contact of the hood switch pad with
the hood switch.
This bulletin provides instructions to replace the hood switch pad with a revised part.
APPLICABLE VEHICLES: Model: Genesis(BH), Genesis Coupe(BK), Tiburon(GK), Sonata(NF),

Tucson(JM), Entourage(EP), ELANTRA(HD)
PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-BE-026
> Sep > 09 > Antitheft System - Alarm System Self-Activates > Page 320
1. Open the hood and remove the rubber switch pad.

2. Install the new switch pad.
3. Close the hood and press the LOCK button on the transmitter. Verify that all the doors lock and
the hazard lights flash one time.
4. Press the LOCK button on the transmitter two times to confirm the "Horn Answer Back" feature
is operational.
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: >
09-BE-026 > Sep > 09 > Antitheft System - Alarm System Self-Activates
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): All Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - Alarm System
Self-Activates
Group BODY
Number 09-BE-026

DESCRIPTION:
the hood switch.

PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: >
09-BE-026 > Sep > 09 > Antitheft System - Alarm System Self-Activates > Page 326

is operational.
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): > 09-BE-001 > Mar > 09 > Body - Sliding Door Reopens 6 Inches When Closing
Power Sliding Door Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Sliding Door Reopens 6 Inches
When Closing
Group: ELECTRICAL
Number:09-BE-001
Date: MARCH, 2009
DESCRIPTION:
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
Door Module.
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): > 09-BE-001 > Mar > 09 > Body - Sliding Door Reopens 6 Inches When Closing > Page
332
NOTE:
NOTE:
relearn the doors.
333
NOTE:
339
NOTE:
NOTE:
relearn the doors.
340
NOTE:
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 341
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection
Inspection
Hood Switch
1. Disconnect the connector from the hood switch.
2. Check for continuity between the terminals and ground according to the table.
Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 349
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Description and Operation
Operation Principle
The sensor emits ultrasonic wave to the objects, and it measures the time until reflected wave
returns, and calculates the distance to the object.
Distance Detection Type
Direct detection type and indirect detection type are used together for improving effectiveness of
the detection.
1. Direct detection type: One sensor transmits and receives signals to measure the distance.
2. Indirect detection type: One sensor transmits signals and the other sensor receives the signals
to measure the distance.
Measurement Principle
Rear parking assist system is a complementary device for reversing. BWS detects objects behind
vehicle and provides the driver with buzzer alarm finding objects in a certain area, using ultrasonic
wave propagation speed and time. The propagation speed formula of ultrasonic wave in air is
following :
v=331.5 + 0.6t (m/s) v=ultrasonic wave propagation speed t=ambient temperature
The basic principle of distance measurement using ultrasonic wave is :
Sensor Detection Range

NOTE:
1. 14cm (Diameter) plastic rod is used for the test target. 2. The test result may differ by a different
target object. 3. Detection range may be reduced by dirt accumulated on sensor, and extremely hot
or cold weather. 4. The following object may not be detected. -
Sharp object or thin object like rope.
- Cotton, sponge, snow or other materials absorbing sonic wave.
- Smaller objects than 14cm (Diameter), 1m length.

Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
Replacement
1. Remove the rear bumper ( Refer to the Body group - "Rear bumper") 2. Disconnect the sensor
connector at the inside of the rear bumper (C), and then remove the sensor (B) from the housing
(A).

Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder
Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
Front Door Key Switch
1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator.
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Fuel Door Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Fuel Filler Switch
Component Information > Locations > Fuel Filler Switch > Page 366
Fuel Door Switch: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. To check the Input Value of fuel filler door open switch,
select option "08. BODY CONTROL MODULE".
3. Select option "DRIVER DOOR MODULE".
4. Select option "02. CURRENT DATA".

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor >
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): > 09-BE-026 > Sep > 09 > Antitheft System - Alarm System Self-Activates
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Customer Interest Antitheft System - Alarm System
Self-Activates
Group BODY
Number 09-BE-026

DESCRIPTION:
the hood switch.

PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): > 09-BE-026 > Sep > 09 > Antitheft System - Alarm System Self-Activates > Page 377

is operational.
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): > 09-BE-026 > Sep > 09 > Antitheft System - Alarm System Self-Activates
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): All Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - Alarm System
Self-Activates
Group BODY
Number 09-BE-026

DESCRIPTION:
the hood switch.

PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): > 09-BE-026 > Sep > 09 > Antitheft System - Alarm System Self-Activates > Page 383

is operational.
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection
Inspection
Hood Switch
1. Disconnect the connector from the hood switch.
2. Check for continuity between the terminals and ground according to the table.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning
Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Keyless Entry And Burglar Alarm
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Keyless Entry And Burglar Alarm
Inspection
Front Door Lock Switch
Sliding Door Lock Switch
1. Remove the sliding door trim panel. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the actuator.
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Keyless Entry And Burglar Alarm > Page 396
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Door Lock Actuators
Inspection
Front Door Lock Switch
Sliding Door Lock Switch
1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the actuator.
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Door Lock Switch
Inspection
1. The DDM inputs can be checked using the scan tool. 2. To check the Input Value of door lock
switch, select option "08. BODY CONTROL MODULE".
3. Select option "04. DRIVER DOOR MODULE".
4. Select option "02. CURRENT DATA".
5. To check the Input Value of door lock switch in force mode, select option "05. ACTUATION
TEST".
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 399
Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair
Replacement
DDM/ADM
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove the front door trim panel. 3. Remove the
door module (A) mounting screws (5EA) after disconnecting the connector (3EA) from the actuator.
4. Remove the front door modules (DDMDM) from the front door trim panel.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
1. Disconnect the 12P connector from the switch.
Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the front door trim panel. 3. Remove the
power window main switch mounting screws (3EA) (A) after disconnecting the switch connector
(12pin) from the switch.
4. Remove the switch from the front door trim panel. 5. Installation is the reverse of removal.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Limit Switch
Component Information > Locations > Limit Switch > Page 409
Component Information > Locations > Limit Switch > Page 410
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative(-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the door trim panel . 3. Remove the
switch connector (16pin) from the wiring harness, And then loosen the mounting screws (3EA).
4. Remove the switch from the front door panel. 5. Installation is the reverse of removal.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Sliding Door
Motor Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Power Sliding Door Optical Sensor RH
Motor Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Power Sliding Door Optical Sensor RH > Page 416
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Sliding Door Switch LH
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Sliding Door Switch LH > Page 421
Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Sliding Door Detent Switch
Power Sliding Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Sliding Door Detent Switch
Inspection
1. Detent switch detect the latch position within latch assembly.
2. Check the power sliding door control module input/output value by using the diagnostic tool. 3.
When checking the detent switch, select a vehicle type and "POWER SLIDING/TAIL GATE" menu.
4. Select the "POWER SLIDING DOOR".
5. Select the detent sensor output. And then check the detent switch output with operating power
sliding door.
** Above voltage and numerical value may be different from the real value.
6. If there is no change in output, change the latch assembly.

Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Sliding Door Detent Switch > Page 426
Power Sliding Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Sliding Door Latch Switch
Inspection
1. Check the power sliding door control module input/output value by using the diagnostic tool. 2.
When checking the latch, select a vehicle type and "POWER SLIDING/TAIL GATE" menu.
3. Select the "POWER SLIDING DOOR".
4. Select the sensor output. And then check the unlatch feedback (Unlocked state) voltage while
operating power sliding door in power mode.
5. If there is no change in voltage, change the latch.
Anti Pinch Strip
1. Check the power sliding door control module input/output value by using the diagnostic tool. If
the operation of door control module is abnormal,
replace anti pinch strip control module.
2. When checking the anti pinch strip operation, select a vehicle type and "POWER SLIDING/TAIL
GATE" menu.
3. Select power sliding door.

4. Select the sensor output. And then check the anti pinch strip sensor output while operating
power sliding door in power mode.
5. Change the anti pinch strip sensor, if there is no change from OFF to ON during operation.
Power Sliding Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Sliding Door Switch
Inspection
Overhead Console Door Switch Inspection
1. Check the overhead console door switch input/output value by using the diagnostic tool. If the
operation of overhead console door switch is
abnormal, check the IPM and replace.
2. When checking the overhead console switch operation, select a vehicle type and "IPM" menu.
3. Select a in panel module (IPM) and "CURRENT DATA".
4. Check the PSD PTG power control switch and PSD left/right switch.
5. Confirm that output is changed by the controlling ON/OFF of each switch on the overhead
console.
Door Handle Switch Inspection
1. Check the power sliding door control module input/output value by using the diagnostic tool. If
the operation of door control module is abnormal,
replace power sliding door control module.
2. When checking handle switch operation, select a vehicle type and "POWER SLIDING/TAIL
GATE" menu.
3. Select the "POWER SLIDING DOOR" menu to check.

4. Select the sensor output. And then check the handle switch output value changed by the
controlling PSD or PTG.
5. Check that the handle switch output changed from OFF to ON during PSD or PTG operation.
Trim Switch Inspection
1. Check the trim switch input/output value by using the diagnostic tool. If the operation of rear area
module (RAM) is abnormal, replace RAM. 2. When checking the trim switch operation, select a
vehicle type and "IPM" menu.
3. Select a rear area module (RAM) and sensor output.
4. Check the value of RSD/LSD, left/right door switch.
5. Confirm that the door switch output is changed by the controlling ON/OFF switch on center pillar
trim.
Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 430
Power Sliding Door Switch: Service and Repair
Replacement
Overhead Console Switch
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Open the sunglass case cover from the overhead
console then remove the 2 screws holding the overhead console (A). And then disconnect the
connector (B).
Door Trim Switch
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the connector (B) and door trim switch
(A) from the center pillar (C) by using the scraper.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate
Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Power Tail Gate Optical Sensor
Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Power Tail Gate Optical Sensor > Page 435
Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 436
Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
1. Check the power tail gate control module input/output value by using the diagnostic tool. If the
operation of tailgate control module is abnormal,
replace anti pinch strip control module.
2. When checking the anti pinch strip operation, select a vehicle type and "POWER
SLIDING/TAILGATE" menu.
3. Select "POWER TAILGATE".
4. Select the sensor output. And then check the anti pinch strip sensor output while operating
power tailgate in power mode.
5. Change the anti pinch strip sensor, if there is no change from OFF to ON during operation.
Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 437
Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Service and Repair
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the tail gate trim . 3. Remove the
anti-pinch strip sensor connector (A).
4. Remove the left and right side anti-pinch strip sensor (B) after removing the screws (5EA).
5. Installation is the reverse of removal. Part (C) has to be assembled using the cloth.
Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations
Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 441
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
Tailgate Key Switch
1. Remove the tailgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Seat Heater Switch: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the seat back .
3. Remove the mounting screw, center facia panel switch and then disconnect connectors.
4. Remove the seat warmer switch (A) from center facia panel switch.
5. Check for the continuity between the terminals.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Seat Memory Switch: Service and Repair
Replacement
1. Remove the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the front door trim panel in the car. 3.
Remove the switch (A) mounting screws (3EA) after disconnecting the 16pin switch connector.
4. Remove the connector from the front door trim panel. 5. Installation is the reverse of removal.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof
Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the lens and open the sunglass case
cover from the overhead console then remove the 2 screws holding the overhead console. And
disconnect the connector then remove the overhead console lamp assembly from the headliner.
3. Check for continuity between the terminals. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the
sunroof switch.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Door Lock Actuators
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Door Lock Actuators
Inspection
Tailgate Lock Switch
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Door Lock Actuators > Page 457
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Testing and Inspection Keyless Entry And Burglar Alarm
Inspection
Tailgate Lock Switch
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Tail Gate Switch
Inspection
Overhead Console Door Switch Inspection
1. Check the overhead console door switch input/output value by using the diagnostic tool. If the
operation of overhead console door switch is
abnormal, check the IPM and replace.
2. When checking the overhead console switch operation, select a vehicle type and "IPM".
3. Select a in panel module (IPM) and "02. CURRENT DATA".
4. Check the PSD PTG power control switch and PTG switch output value.
5. Confirm that output is changed by the controlling ON/OFF of each switch on the overhead
console.
Tailgate Switch Inspection
1. Check the power tailgate control module input/output value by using the diagnostic tool. If the
operation of tailgate module is abnormal, replace
power tailgate switch.
2. When checking tailgate switch operation, select a vehicle type and "POWER
SLIDING/TAILGATE" menu.
3. Select the "POWER TAILGATE" menu to check.

4. Select the sensor output. And then check the power tailgate local switch output value changed
by the controlling PTG.
5. If there is no input/output change from OFF to ON during PTG operation, change the power
tailgate switch.
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 460
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair
Replacement
Overhead Console Switch
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Open the sunglass case cover from the overhead
console then remove the 2 screws holding the overhead console (A). And then disconnect the
connector (B).
Tail Gate Switch
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Open the tail gate and remove the tail gate trim
switch (A) using the appropriate trim tool. And then remove the connector (B).

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral
Accelerometer > Component Information > Specifications
Lateral Accelerometer: Specifications
Specification
Output Characteristic
Accelerometer > Component Information > Specifications > Page 468
Lateral Accelerometer: Diagrams
Circuit Diagram (Yaw-rate & Lateral G Sensor)

STACK:
Lateral Accelerometer: Description and Operation

Description
1. The yaw-rate & lateral G sensor is applied for the ESC system. 2. The yaw-rate is the angular
velocity, when a vehicle turns a corner, and the lateral G is the acceleration to move a vehicle out of
the way when
cornering.
3. The sensor is located in the crash pad lower floor on vehicle.
Specification

STACK:
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Instrument Cluster
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Instrument Cluster
Brake Fluid Level Warning Switch
Inspection
1. Remove the connector (A) from the switch located at the brake fluid reservoir (B). 2. Verify that
continuity exists between switch terminals 1 and 2 while pressing the switch (float) down with a rod.
Parking Brake Switch

Inspection
The parking brake switch is a push type. It is located at the side of the parking brake pedal.
1. Check that there is continuity between the terminal and switch body with the switch (A) ON. 2.
Check that there is no continuity between the terminal and switch body with the switch OFF.
If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch or inspect its ground connection.
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Instrument Cluster > Page 478
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Parking Brake Switch
Inspection
1. Remove the floor console and the connector (B) from the switch (A).
2. Inspect the continuity between (-) terminal and the ground.
A. When the brake lever is pulled, there should be the continuity between them. B. When the brake
lever is released, there should be no continuity between them.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering
Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Specifications
Steering Angle Sensor: Specifications
Specification
Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Steering Angle Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 484
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Steering Angle Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Steering Angle Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
Circuit Diagram( Steering Wheel Speed Angle Sensor)

Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 498
Steering Angle Sensor: Description and Operation
Description
General Data
The steering angle speed sensor detects the angle of the steering wheel in order to which direction
a user chooses.
Measureing Principle
A non contact, analog angle sensor carrying out absolute measuring by the use of the
Anisotropic-Magneto-Resistive effect (AMR).Measuring of the absolute angle by means of a
toothed measuring gear with magnetic properties in combination with different ratios.
Corresponding AMR elements that change their electrical resistance according to the magnetic
field direction detect the angle position of the measuring gears.A micro-controller decodes the
measured voltage signals after A/D converting with the help of a mathematical function. Output of
the digital angle value and velocity via CAN-interface.
Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) Calibration
1. PURPOSE OF calibration
A. On vehicle control, an ESC analyzes the intention of the driver. B. An ESC recognizes a steering
angle which a driver rotates through the steering angle sensor. C. A steering angle sensor used in
ESC adjusts 0° setting of steering wheel through K-line or CAN communication.
2. STEERING ANGLE SENSOR (SAS) CALIBRATION METHOD
(1) Align the wheel to the straight line. (steering wheel < ± 5° )
ex) Perform the wheel alignment first. Align the wheel to the straight line. A driver moves the
vehicle to the front and back about 5 meters twice or three times.
(2) Connect Scan tool to the vehicle. (3) Select Brake system. (4) Select Steering angle
sensor(SAS) calibration.
(5) Perform the Steering angle sensor(SAS) calibration.

Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 499
(6) Perform the procedure continuously.
(7) The procedure is finished. Push the "ESC" key.
(8) Scanner OFF. (9) Remove the scanner from the vehicle.
(10) Confirm the Steering angle sensor(SAS) calibration as driving the vehicle.(turn left once, turn
right once)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction
Control Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
Traction Control Switch: Description and Operation
Description
1. The ESC OFF switch is for the user to turn off the ESC system. 2. The ESC OFF lamp is on
when ESC OFF switch is engaged.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction
Control Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 503
Traction Control Switch: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
1. Remove the ESC OFF switch from the switch panel on the crash pad of the driver's side.
2. Check the continuity between the switch terminals as the ESC OFF switch is engaged.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Rear Wheel Sensor
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Rear Wheel Sensor > Page 508
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Front Wheel Speed Sensor
Components
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Rear Wheel Speed Sensor
Components
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations
Front Wheel Speed Sensor
Components
Rear Wheel Speed Sensor
Components
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
Components
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Components
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Wheel Speed Sensor
Wheel Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Front Wheel Speed Sensor
Inspection
1. Measure the output voltage between the terminal of the wheel speed sensor and the body
ground.
CAUTION: In order to protect the wheel speed sensor, when measuring output voltage, a 75Ohms
resistor must be used as shown.
2. Compare the change of the output voltage of the wheel speed sensor to the normal change of
the output voltage as shown below.
A. V_low : 0.44 V ~ 0.63 V B. V_high : 0.885 V ~ 1.26 V C. Frequency range : 1 - 2,500 Hz

Speed Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Wheel Speed Sensor > Page 517
Wheel Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Rear Wheel Speed Sensor
Inspection
1. Measure the output voltage between the terminal of the wheel speed sensor and the body
ground.
CAUTION: In order to protect the wheel speed sensor, when measuring output voltage, a 75Ohms
resistor must be used as shown.
2. Compare the change of the output voltage of the wheel speed sensor to the normal change of
the output voltage as shown below.
A. V_low : 0.44 V ~ 0.63 V B. V_high : 0.885 V ~ 1.26 V C. Frequency range : 1 - 2,500 Hz

Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front Wheel Speed Sensor
Components
Repair Procedures
Removal
1. Remove the front wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (A) and the wire bracket mounting bolt (B).
2. Remove the wire bracket bolt (A).

Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor > Page 520
3. Remove the front wheel guard. 4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor after disconnecting the
wheel speed sensor connector (A).
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Speed Sensor
Components
Repair Procedures
Removal
1. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (A).
2. Remove the rear seat side pad then disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor connector (A).
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate
Sensor > Component Information > Specifications
Yaw Rate Sensor: Specifications
Specification
Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 526
Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations
Components
Yaw Rate Sensor: Diagrams

Yaw Rate Sensor: Description and Operation

Description
1. The yaw-rate & lateral G sensor is applied for the ESC system. 2. The yaw-rate is the angular
velocity, when a vehicle turns a corner, and the lateral G is the acceleration to move a vehicle out of
the way when
cornering.
3. The sensor is located in the crash pad lower floor on vehicle.
Specification

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information >
Specifications > Engine Control System
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Specifications Engine Control System
Specification
Specifications > Engine Control System > Page 536
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Specifications Fuel System - Specifications
Specification
Sensor Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS)
- Type: Thermistor type - Specification

Specifications > Page 537
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations
Component Location
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 540
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Electrical Diagrams
Circuit Diagram
Page 554
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
Description
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) is located in the engine coolant passage of the
cylinder head for detecting the engine coolant temperature. The ECTS uses a thermistor whose
resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of the ECTS decreases as the
temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The reference 5 V in the
PCM is supplied to the ECTS via a resistor in the PCM.That is, the resistor in the PCM and the
thermistor in the ECTS are connected in series. When the resistance value of the thermistor in the
ECTS changes according to the engine coolant temperature, the output voltage also changes.
During cold engine operation the PCM increases the fuel injection duration and controls the ignition
timing using the information of engine coolant temperature to avoid engine stalling and improve
drivability.
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Engine Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
Engine Coolant Temperature Sender
1. Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between the terminal 2 and ground.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch >
Cruise Control Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Cruise Control Switch: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Cruise Control Switch: Electrical Diagrams
Circuit Diagram
Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
Measuring Resistance
1. Disconnect the cruise control switch connector from the control switch.
2. Measure resistance between terminals on the control switch when each function switch is ON
(switch is depressed).
3. If not within specification, replace switch.
Measuring Voltage
1. Connect the cruise control switch connector to the control switch.
2. Measure voltage between terminals on the harness side connector when each function switch is
ON (switch is depressed).
3. If not within specification, replace switch.

Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery (-) terminal. 2. Remove the driver side air bag module. 3. Disconnect the
cruise control switch connector and then remove the cruise control switch(A) with two screws.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Engine Mechanical System
Oil Pressure Sender: Testing and Inspection Engine Mechanical System
Inspection
Oil Pressure Switch
1. Check the continuity between the terminal and the body with an ohmmeter.
If there is no continuity, replace the oil pressure switch.
2. Check the continuity between the terminal and the body when the fine wire is pushed. If there is
continuity even when the fine wire is pushed,
replace the switch.
3. If there is no continuity when a 50kpa (7psi) vacuum is applied through the oil hole, the switch is
operaing properly.
Check for air leakage. If air leaks, the diaphragm is broken. Replace it.
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Engine Mechanical System > Page 585
Oil Pressure Sender: Testing and Inspection Body Electrical System
Inspection
Oil Pressure Switch
1. Check that there is continuity between the oil press switch terminal and ground with the engine
off. 2. Check that there is no continuity between the terminal and ground with the engine running. 3.
If operation is not as specified, replace the switch.
4. Connect the oil pressure switch wire harness. 5. Turn the ignition switch ON. Check that the
warning lamp lights up. If the warning lamp doesn't light, test the wire harness.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch,
Engine > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Air Conditioning Switch >
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor /
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations
Component Location
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 596
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation
Description
1. The ambient temperature sensor is located at the front of the condenser and detects ambient air
temperature. It is a negative type thermistor;
resistance will increase with lower temperature, and decrease with higher temperatures.
2. The sensor output will be used for discharge temperature control, temperature regulation door
control, blower motor level control, mix mode
control and in-car humidity control.
NOTE: If the ambient temperature is below 0°C (32°F), the A/C compressor will be stopped. The
compressor will be operated by manual operating.
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 597
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
1. Ignition "OFF" 2. Disconnect ambient temperature sensor. 3. Check the resistance of ambient
temperature sensor between terminals 1 and 2 whether it is changed by changing of the ambient
temperature.
Specification
4. If the measured resistance is not specification, substitute with a known-good ambient

temperature sensor and check for proper operation. 5. If the problem is corrected, replace the
ambient temperature sensor.
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Components and Components Location
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Components and Components
Location
Component Location
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Components and Components Location > Page 600
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Repair Procedures
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the front bumper. 3. Remove the
ambient temperature sensor (A).
4. Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor /
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations
Component Location
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 604
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
Description
1. In-car air temperature sensor is located at the center facia lower panel. 2. The sensor contains a
thermistor which measures the temperature of the inside. The signal decided by the resistance
value which changes in
accordance with perceived inside temperature, is delivered to heater control unit and according to
this signal the control unit regulates in car temperature to intended value.
3. It perceives the inside temperature, changes the resistance value, and enters the corresponding
voltage into the automatic temperature control
module.
4. It is used for discharge temperature control, sensor fail safe, temperature door control, blower
motor level control, and A/C auto control.
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
1. Ignition "ON" 2. Blow air at multiple temperatures into the in-car sensor air inlet. Measure sensor
resistance between 2 and 4 terminals.
Specification
NOTE: In car sensor is negative type thermistor that resistance will rise with lower temperature,
and reduce with higher temperature.
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Components and Components Location
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Components and Components Location
Component Location
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Components and Components Location > Page 608
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Repair Procedures
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the A/C control panel. . 3. Disconnect
the connector of in-car sensor. Loosen the mounting 2 screws and then remove the in-car sensor
(A).

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor /
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations
Component Location
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
Description
The evaporator temperature sensor will detect the evaporator core temperature and interrupt
compressor relay power in order to prevent evaporator freezing by excessive cooling.
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
1. Ignition "OFF" 2. Disconnect evaporator temperature sensor. 3. Using the multi-tester, Measure
resistance between terminal "1" and "2" of evaporator temperature sensor.
Specification
4. If the measured resistance is not specification, substitute with a known-good evaporator

temperature sensor and check for proper operation. 5. If the problem is corrected, replace the
evaporator temperature sensor.
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Components and Components
Location
Component Location
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Repair Procedures
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the center lower side cover(B).
3. Disconnect the evaporator sensor connector (A). 4. Loosen 2 screws and then remove the
evaporator sensor cover(B). 5. Remove the evaporator sensor.
CAUTION: Take care that evaporator core pins are not bent.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Humidity Sensor > Component
Humidity Sensor: Locations
Component Location
Humidity Sensor: Description and Operation
Description
1. Humidity sensor is located at the lower crush pad and detected in-car humidity for in-car
humidity control. 2. If ambient air temperature or in-car humidity is outside certain range, it will turn
on A/C to control in-car humidity preventing in car fogging.
Air conditioner operation depends on ambient temperature and humidity.

Humidity Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
1. Ignition "ON" 2. Using the scan tool. 3. Check the frequency of humidity sensor between
terminals 2 and 3.
4. If the measured resistance is not specification, substitute with a known-good humidity sensor
and check for proper operation. 5. If the problem is corrected, replace the Humidity sensor.
Humidity Sensor: Service and Repair Components and Components Location
Component Location
Humidity Sensor: Service and Repair Repair Procedures
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the center facia lower panel. 3.
Disconnect the humidity sensor connector (A). 4. Loosen 2 screws and then remove the humidity
sensor (B).

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > A/C Pressure Transducer
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations A/C Pressure Transducer
Component Location
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > A/C Pressure Transducer > Page 629
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Engine Control System
Component Location
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 630
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
Description
A/C pressure transducer cover the pressure value of the high pressure line into a voltage value.
The ECM uses this converted voltage to control the cooling fan speed and to stop compressor
engagement when the refrigerant line temperature is too high or low to optimize refrigerant
compression.
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 631
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
1. Measure the pressure of high pressure line by measuring voltage output between NO.1 and
NO.2 terminals.
2. Inspect the voltage value whether it is sufficient to be regular value or not.
Voltage = 0.00878835 * PA + 0.37081095
3. If the measured voltage value is not specification, replace the A/C pressure transducer.
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Pressure Transducer
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair A/C Pressure Transducer
Component Location
Repair Procedures
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/charging
station. 3. Disconnect A/C pressure transducer connector(A).
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Pressure Transducer > Page 634
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Dual Pressure Switch
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/charging
station. 3. Disconnect A/C pressure transducer connector(A).
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Solar Sensor: Locations
Component Location
Solar Sensor: Description and Operation
Description
1. The photo sensor (A) is located at the center of defrost nozzle. 2. The photo sensor contains a
photovoltaic (sensitive to sunlight) diode. The solar radiation received by its light receiving portion,
generates an
electromotive force in proportion to the amount of radiation received which is transferred to the
automatic temperature control module so that the solar radiation compensation will be performed.
Solar Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
1. Ignition "ON" 2. Using the scan tool. 3. Emit intensive light toward photo sensor using a lamp,
and check the output voltage change. 4. The voltage will rise with higher intensive light and reduce
with lower intensive light.
Solar Sensor: Service and Repair Components and Components Location
Component Location
Solar Sensor: Service and Repair Repair Procedures
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. With a flat screw driver, remove the photo sensor
(B) from the center of defrost nozzle (A).
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Front Door Key Switch LH
Component Information > Locations > Front Door Key Switch LH > Page 648
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Warning Switch
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Warning Switch
Inspection
Door Warning Switch
1. Remove driver's crash pad lower panel. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the door warning
switch.
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each position according to the table.
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Warning Switch > Page 653
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Keyless Entry and Burglar Alarm
Inspection
Door Switch
Remove the door switch and check for continuity between the terminals.
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Instrument Cluster
Inspection
Door Switch
Remove the door switch and check for continuity between the terminals. If continuity is not as
specified, replace the door switch.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
Fuel Gauge Sender
1. Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of sender connector (A)
at each float level.
2. Also check that the resistance changes smoothly when the float is moved from "E" to "F".
CAUTION: If the height resistance is not within specifications, replace the fuel sender as an
assembly. After completing this test, wipe the sender dry and reinstall it in the fuel tank.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Instrument Cluster
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Instrument Cluster
Inspection
1. Remove the connector (A) from the switch located at the brake fluid reservoir (B). 2. Verify that
continuity exists between switch terminals 1 and 2 while pressing the switch (float) down with a rod.

Inspection
The parking brake switch is a push type. It is located at the side of the parking brake pedal.
1. Check that there is continuity between the terminal and switch body with the switch (A) ON. 2.
Check that there is no continuity between the terminal and switch body with the switch OFF.
If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch or inspect its ground connection.
Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Instrument Cluster > Page 663
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Parking Brake Switch
Inspection
1. Remove the floor console and the connector (B) from the switch (A).
2. Inspect the continuity between (-) terminal and the ground.
A. When the brake lever is pulled, there should be the continuity between them. B. When the brake
lever is released, there should be no continuity between them.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor
Ambient Light Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
While operating the auto light switch, check if the operations are normal as shown in the timing
chart.
1. Auto light sensor value is always read at IGN ON. 2. Light is turned ON after 1sec±0.1sec when
auto light sensor value is same as light ON input value. 3. Light is turned OFF after 2sec±0.2sec
when sensor value is same as light OFF input value. 4. Tail lamp and head lamp are turned ON
when sensor value is same as tail lamp ON input value. 5. Light ON value of sensor is based on
the below table. 6. Head lamp signal is output when head lamp switch is ON. After head lamp is
turned OFF, head lamp signal output is immediately stopped if head
lamp OFF luminance condition is met at auto light switch ON.
T1 : 2 ± 0.2 sec T2 : 2 ± 0.2 sec.

Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
Replacement
Photo & auto light sensor inspection
1. Disconnect the crash pad . 2. Remove the Photo & auto light sensor (B) from crash pad (A).

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch >
Combination Switch: Locations
Component Location
Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
1. Multi function switch operates head lamps and wiper through LIN communication with BCM. 2.
Check BCM input/output specification of multi function switch using the scan tool. If the
specification is abnormal, replace the head lamp or wiper
switch.
3. If diagnosis is required on the multi function switch, select "ENTOURAGE" and "BCM".
4. Select "In panel Module".
5. Select "Current data" and check the input/output condition of BCM.

Combination Switch: Service and Repair Components and Components Location
Component Location
Combination Switch: Service and Repair Repair Procedures
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the steering column upper and lower
shrouds (A) after removing 3 screws.
3. Disconnect the light switch(A) connector and pin(B).

4. Remove the wiper switch (A) after disconnecting the connector and pin(B).

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Front Door Key Switch LH
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Warning Switch
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Warning Switch
Inspection
Door Warning Switch
1. Remove driver's crash pad lower panel. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the door warning
switch.
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each position according to the table.
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Keyless Entry and Burglar Alarm
Inspection
Door Switch
Remove the door switch and check for continuity between the terminals.
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Instrument Cluster
Inspection
Door Switch
Remove the door switch and check for continuity between the terminals. If continuity is not as
specified, replace the door switch.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Glove Box Lamp
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
Check for continuity between terminal and terminal while operating the auto light switch.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch >
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications
> Engine Control System
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Specifications Engine Control System
Specification
> Engine Control System > Page 706
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Specifications Fuel System - Specifications
Specification
Sensor Accelerator Position Sensor (APS)
- Type: Variable resistor type - Specification (When reference voltage = 5.0V)

> Page 707
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Component Location
> Page 708
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
Circuit Diagram
Page 725
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Description
Accelerator Position Sensor (APS) is installed on the accelerator pedal module and detects the
rotation angle of the accelerator pedal. The APS is one of the most important sensors in engine
control system, so it consists of the two sensors which adapt individual sensor power and ground
line. The second sensor monitors the first sensor and its output voltage is half of the first one. If the
ratio of the sensor 1 and 2 is out of the range (approximately 1/2), the diagnostic system judges
that a malfunction has occurred.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Fuel
System - Specifications
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications Fuel System - Specifications
Specification
Sensor Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS)
- Type: Hot-film type - Specification

System - Specifications > Page 730
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications Engine Control System
Specification
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 731
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Component Location
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 732
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Information and Instructions > Page 735
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
Circuit Diagram
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 749
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
Description
Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) is a hot-film type sensor and is located in between the air cleaner
and the throttle body. It consists of a tube, a sensor assembly and honeycomb cell and detects
intake air quantity flowing into the intake manifold. Air flows from the air cleaner assembly through
the honeycomb cell and over the hot film element. At this time, heat transfer is generated by
convection and this sensor loses its energy. This sensor detects the mass air flow by using the
energy loss and transfers the information to the PCM by frequency. The PCM calculates fuel
quantity and ignition timing.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Position Sensor: Specifications
Specification
Sensor Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS)
- Type: Hall effect type - Specification

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Component Location
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component Location
Component Location
Component Location > Page 755
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Photos

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
Circuit Diagram
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 773
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Description
Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) is a hall sensor and detects the camshaft position by using a
hall element. It is related with Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) and detects the piston position of
each cylinder which the CKPS can't detect. The two CMPS are installed on engine head cover of
bank 1 and 2 and uses a target wheel installed on the camshaft. This sensor has a hall-effect IC
which output voltage changes when magnetic field is made on the IC with current flow.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 774
Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Waveform
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Specifications > Engine Control System
Specification
Information > Specifications > Engine Control System > Page 779
Specification

Information > Specifications > Page 780
Component Location
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 783
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Information > Diagrams > Page 797
Description
drivability.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications >
Electrical Specifications
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Specifications
Specification
Sensor Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS)
- Type: Magnetic field sensitive type - Specification

Electrical Specifications > Page 802
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Mechanical Specifications
Specification
Crankshaft position sensor

installation....................................................................................................................0.8-1.2 kgf.m,
7.8-11.8 N.m, 5.8-8.7 lb-ft
Page 803
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Component Location
Page 804
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
Circuit Diagram
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
821
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Description
Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) detects the crankshaft position and is one of the most
important sensors of the engine control system. If there is no CKPS signal input, fuel is not
supplied and the main relay does not operate. That is, vehicle can't run without CKPS signal. This
sensor is installed on transaxle housing and generates alternating current by magnetic flux field
which is made by the sensor and the target wheel when engine runs. The target wheel consists of
58 slots and 2 missing slots on 360 CA (Crank Angle).
822
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Waveform
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Inspection
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Emission Control
System
Fuel Level Sensor: Locations Emission Control System
Components Location
System > Page 830
Fuel Level Sensor: Locations Engine Control System
Component Location
System > Page 831
Fuel Level Sensor: Locations Fuel Delivery System
Component Location
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Specifications >
Emission Control System
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Specifications Emission Control System
Specifications
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor (FTPS)
- Type : Piezo - Resistivity type - Specification

Emission Control System > Page 836
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Specifications Engine Control System
Specification
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Specifications Fuel System - Specifications
Specification
Sensor Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor (FTPS)
- Type : Piezo-Resistivity type - Specification

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Photo
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Photo >
Page 840
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Emission Control System

Components Location
Page 841
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Engine Control System
Component Location
Page 842
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Fuel Delivery System
Component Location
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
Circuit Diagram
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
859
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
Description
The evaporative emission control system prevents hydrocarbon vapors from escaping from the fuel
tank into the atmosphere where they could form photochemical smog. Gasoline vapors are
collected in the charcoal canister. The Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor (FTPS) is installed on fuel pump
assembly and is an integral part of the evaporative monitoring system. The PCM monitors the
FTPS signal to detect vacuum decay and excess vacuum. The FTPS measures the difference
between the air pressure inside the fuel tank and atmospheric air pressure to check the purge
control solenoid valve operation and for leak detection in the evaporative emission control system
by monitoring pressure and vacuum levels in the fuel tank during the purge control solenoid valve
operating cycles.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Specifications >
Fuel System - Specifications
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications Fuel System - Specifications
Specification
Sensor Intake Air Temperature Sensor (IATS)

Fuel System - Specifications > Page 864
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications Engine Control System
Specification
Page 865
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
Component Location
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
Circuit Diagram
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
882
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Description
Intake Air Temperature Sensor (IATS) is installed inside the Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) and
detects the intake air temperature. To calculate precise air quantity, correction of the air
temperature is needed because air density varies according to the temperature. So the PCM uses
not only MAFS signal but also IATS signal. This sensor has a Negative Temperature Coefficient
(NTC) and its resistance is in inverse proportion to the temperature.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control
System
Knock Sensor: Specifications Engine Control System
Specification
System > Page 887
Knock Sensor: Specifications Fuel System - Specifications
Specification
Sensor Knock Sensor (KS)
- Type: Piezo-electricity type - Specification

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Location
Knock Sensor: Locations Component Location
Component Location
> Page 890
Knock Sensor: Locations Photo

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Knock Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
Circuit Diagram
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 907
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Description
Knocking is a phenomenon characterized by undesirable vibration and noise and can cause engine
damage. Knock Sensor (KS) senses engine knocking and the two sensors are installed inside the
V-valley of the cylinder block. When knocking occurs, the vibration from the cylinder block is
applied as pressure to the piezoelectric element. At this time, this sensor transfers the voltage
signal higher than the specified value to the PCM and the PCM retards the ignition timing. If the
knocking disappears after retarding the ignition timing, the PCM will advance the ignition timing.
This sequential control can improve engine power, torque and fuel economy.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Specifications
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Specifications Engine Control System
Specification
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Specifications Fuel System - Specifications
Specification
Sensor Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (MAPS)
- Type: Piezo-resistive pressure type - Specification

> Page 913
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations
Component Location
> Page 914
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
Circuit Diagram
Page 931
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation
Description
Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (MAPS) is speed-density type sensor and is installed on the
surge tank. This MAPS senses absolute pressure in surge tank and transfers this analog signal
proportional to the pressure to the PCM. The PCM calculates the intake air quantity and engine
speed based on this signal. This MAPS consists of piezo-electric element and hybrid IC that
amplifies the element output signal. The element is silicon diaphragm type and adapts pressure
sensitive variable resistor effect of semi-conductor. 100% vacuum and the manifold pressure
applies to both sides of it respectively. That is, this sensor outputs the silicon variation proportional
to pressure change by voltage.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Specifications
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Specifications Engine Control System
Specification
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Specifications Fuel System - Specifications
Specification
Sensor Cvvt Oil Temperature Sensor (OTS)

> Page 937
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Locations
Component Location
> Page 938
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Diagrams >
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Electrical Diagrams
Circuit Diagram
Page 955
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation
Description
The CVVT Oil Temperature Sensor (OTS) is a negative coefficient thermistor used by the PCM to
measure engine oil temperature for the purpose of adjusting CVVT calculations.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Engine Controls - P0300-P0306/O2 Sensor DTC Diagnostics
Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - P0300-P0306/O2 Sensor DTC
Diagnostics
Group FUEL SYSTEM
Number 10-FL-012
Date OCTOBER, 2010
Model 3.3L SANTA FE AND SONATA, 3.8L ENTOURAGE, AZERA, AND VERACRUZ
Subject P0300-P0306 AND/OR FRONT OXYGEN SENSOR DTC(S)
This bulletin supersedes TSB# 08-FL-002-1 to correct model year and OP Code time.
DESCRIPTION:
This bulletin provides diagnostic procedures for 2006-2009 vehicles with 3.3L/3.8L engines and the
following DTC stored:
P0300-P0306 engine misfire DTC and Freeze Frame Data Fuel Trim of at least - 20% indicating
rich shift.
or any of the following 02 sensor DTC(s):
^ P0132/P0152 - Front 02 sensor high voltage
^ P0134/P0154 - Front 02 sensor no activity detected
^ P2196/P2198 - Front 02 sensor stuck rich
^ P2A00/P2A03 - Front 02 sensor no activity
APPLICABLE VEHICLES: ^ 2006-2009 3.3L Santa Fe and Sonata ^ 2006-2009 3.8L Entourage,
Azera, and Veracruz
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. DTC P0300-P0306 Misfire but no 02 sensor DTC stored:
Inspect the Freeze Frame Data for either the Long Term or Short Term Fuel Trim shifted -20% or
more at a particular bank. The following example illustrates the fuel trim of -20% or more occurred
at Bank-1 only:
Engine Controls - P0300-P0306/O2 Sensor DTC Diagnostics > Page 960
2. Inspect for any of the following Front 02 sensor DTC(s) stored:
^ Bank-1 Front 02 Sensor DTC:
^ P0132 - Front 02 sensor high voltage
^ P0134 - Front 02 sensor no activity detected
^ P2196 - Front 02 sensor stuck rich
^ P2A00 - Front 02 sensor no activity

3. Should either #1 or #2 condition be present, replace the related Front 02 sensor at the applicable
bank:
NOTE:
The following Rear 02 sensor DTC may have set as a result of the Front 02 sensor:
^ P2270 Rear 02 sensor stuck lean (bank-1)
Do not replace the rear 02 sensor
4. Erase all DTC(s).

PARTS INFORMATION
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control
System
Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Engine Control System
Specification
System > Page 965
Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Fuel System - Specifications
Specification
Sensor Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
- Type: Zirconia (ZrO2) type - Specification

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Location
Oxygen Sensor: Locations Component Location
Component Location
> Page 968
> Page 969
Oxygen Sensor: Locations Photo
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Oxygen Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
Circuit Diagram
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 986
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
Description
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) consists of zirconium and alumina and is installed on upstream
and downstream of the Manifold Catalyst Converter (MCC). After it compares oxygen consistency
of the atmosphere with the exhaust gas, it transfers the oxygen consistency of the exhaust gas to
the PCM. When A/F ratio is rich or lean, it generates approximately 1V or 0V respectively. In order
that this sensor normally operates, the temperature of the sensor tip is higher than 370°C (698°F).
So it has a heater which is controlled by the PCM duty signal. When the exhaust gas temperature
is lower than the specified value, the heater warms the sensor tip.
Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Waveform
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine
Control System
Throttle Position Sensor: Specifications Engine Control System
Specification
[Throttle Position Sensor]

Control System > Page 995
Throttle Position Sensor: Specifications Fuel System - Specifications
Specification
Sensor Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page
996
Throttle Position Sensor: Locations
Component Location
997
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T -
MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-AT-013 Date: 090701
A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009
Model ALL EXCEPT VERACRUZ AND GENESIS
Subject AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE RANGE SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES P0705,

P0707, P0708
This TSB supersedes TSB 03-40-013 to add repair information (Steps 2-3).
DESCRIPTION:
An improperly adjusted or improperly operating range switch may result in the following conditions:
^ Diagnostic trouble codes:
^ P0705 - Range switch signal problem
^ P0707 - Range switch - open circuit
^ P0708 - Range switch - short circuit or multiple inputs
^ Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) illuminated
^ Impossible engine start in "P" or "N"
This TSB provides information concerning the proper adjustment and diagnosis of the transaxle
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N > Page 1006
Service Procedure
1. Attach a GDS and check for DTC in both the "Engine" and "Automatic Transaxle" menus. Go to
Step 2 for 2000-02 Accent or Step 3 for 2006-Sonata. For other vehicles, go to Step 4.
2. For 2000-2002 Accent: Check according to TSB 03-40-001. Go to Step 4.
3. For 2006-Sonata, follow steps a, b, c below, then go to Step 4.
a. Check the rear combination lamp ground bolts for tightness and good electrical contact (refer to
applicable ETM, "Tail, Parking & License Lamps" section). Go to Step b.
b. For 2006-Sonata: Remove the center console cover and check for contamination on the M40
connector to the sports mode switch. If so, clean and repair the connector as necessary. Go to step
c below.
c. For 2006-07 Sonata: Remove the front pillar cover and verify the harness is properly routed near
the clip. Repair the harness as necessary. Go to Step 4.
4. Attach a GDS and select vehicle, "A/T" menu, "Current Data" and "Shift Lever Switch".
5. Move the shift lever and confirm the GDS reads the gear shift position as shown above. If so, the
harness currently does not have an open or short circuit between. the PCM/TCM and range switch.
6. Move the shift lever to "N".
7. Insert a 5mm drill or M5 (5mm) bolt in the adjustment hole of the range switch. Check that the
drill or bolt fits into the adjustment holes.
^ If so, go to Step 8
^ If not, go to Step 11
8. Inspect the connector to the range switch for a bent pin or pin not fully inserted and related
wiring for an open or short circuit. If OK, follow the repair procedure below:
RANGE SWITCH REPLACEMENT:
9. Install the new range switch and loosely install two 10 mm bolts.
10. Attach the lever and nut. Tighten the nut to specification. Go to Step 11.
Specification: 11-13 lb ft. (15-18 Nm, 150-180 kg.cm)
RANGE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT:
11. Loosen the two 10 mm mounting bolts.
12. Disconnect the shift cable at the lever.
13. Insert a 5mm drill or M5 (5mm) bolt in the adjustment hole of the range switch. Tighten the two
10 mm mounting bolts to specification. Remove the 5mm drill or M5 bolt.

14. Move the shift lever to the "N" position. Attach the shift cable to the lever and install the nut.
Tighten the nut to specification.
15. Attach the connector.
16. Drive the vehicle two key-on to key-off drive cycles, including shifting to gears D, 3, 2, L (if
equipped) and R. If the:
^ DTC does not reset, return the vehicle to the customer.
^ DTC resets, repair or replace the control harness. If the DTC sets again, replace the TCM.
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul >
09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N > Page 1015
Service Procedure
c below.

Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1019
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > A/T - Speed Sensor Identification/Application
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Speed Sensor Identification/Application
Group AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Number 09-AT-010
Date JUNE, 2009

Model 2007 - ENTOURAGE
Subject CHANGE OF VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
DESCRIPTION:
Two types of vehicle speed sensors (VSS) may be installed on the Entourage 45000-3A500 and
45000-3A501 transmissions.
If you receive a remanufactured transmission with the incorrect vehicle speed sensor, remove the
vehicle speed sensor from the removed transmission and install on the replacement transmission.
NOTE:
The vehicle speed sensor is installed on top of the transmission.
PARTS INFORMATION
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
Vehicle Speed System (1)

Vehicle Speed System Connector Pin Outs

Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications >
Engine Control System
Specification
Engine Control System > Page 1047
Specification

Page 1048
Component Location
Page 1049
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Page 1066
Description
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Fuel
Specification

Specification
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1072
Component Location
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1090
Description
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine
Control System
Specification

Specification

Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page
1096
Component Location
1097
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications
Specification

Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Location
Component Location
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Location >
Page 1104
Page 1105

Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1122
Description
Waveform
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical
Specifications
Specification

Specification

7.8-11.8 N.m, 5.8-8.7 lb-ft
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1129
Component Location
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1147
Description
Waveform
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Component Information > Locations
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 1154
in the vehicle.

Page 1155

For example
Page 1156
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Page 1157
Symbols Part 1
Page 1158
Symbols Part 2
Page 1159
Ignition Switch: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
Page 1160
NOTE: -

Page 1161
be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
Page 1162
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
Page 1163
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

Page 1164
reading.

Page 1165
SHORT FINDER
Page 1166
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1167
Ignition Switch: Service and Repair
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the crash pad lower panel .
3. Remove the screws (2EA) and trip switch connector. Then remove the crash facia panel (B).
4. Remove the ignition switch (A) after loosening the screw with IG ON and disconnecting the 6P
connector.
5. Remove the door warning switch and key illumination lamp (A) after loosening the screws (B)
and disconnecting the 6P connector.
6. Remove the key lock cylinder (C) after pushing lock pin (B) with key ACC.

Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System
Specification
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System > Page
1172
Specification

Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Location
Component Location
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Location > Page 1175

Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions >
Page 1178
in the vehicle.

Page 1179

For example
Page 1180
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Page 1181
Symbols Part 1
Page 1182
Symbols Part 2
Page 1183
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
Page 1184
NOTE: -

Page 1185
be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
Page 1186
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
Page 1187
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

Page 1188
reading.

Page 1189
SHORT FINDER
Page 1190
Page 1191
Circuit Diagram
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1192
Description
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Front Impact Sensor (FIS)
Impact Sensor: Locations Front Impact Sensor (FIS)
Components
Component Information > Locations > Front Impact Sensor (FIS) > Page 1198
Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor (SIS)
Components
Impact Sensor: Locations
Front Impact Sensor (FIS)
Components
Side Impact Sensor (SIS)
Components
Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Impact Sensor (FIS)
Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Front Impact Sensor (FIS)
Description
The front impact sensors (FIS) are installed in the side member. They are remote sensors that
detect acceleration due to a collision at their mounting locations. The primary purpose of the Front
Impact Sensor (FIS) is to provide an indication of a collision. The Front Impact Sensor(FIS) sends
acceleration data to the SRSCM.
Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Impact Sensor (FIS) > Page 1206
Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Side Impact Sensor (SIS)
Description
The Side Impact Sensor (SIS) system consists of two front SIS which are installed inside the
Center Pillar (LH and RH). They are remote sensors that detect acceleration due to collision at their
mounting locations. The primary purpose of the Side Impact Sensor (SIS) is to provide an
indication of a collision. The Side Impact Sensor (SIS) sends acceleration data to the SRSCM.
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor (FIS)
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Sensor (FIS)

Components
Repair Procedures
Removal
CAUTION:
- Removal of the airbag must be performed according to the precautions/ procedures described
previously.
- Before disconnecting the front impact sensor connector, disconnect the front airbag connector(s).
- Do not turn the ignition switch ON and do not connect the battery cable while replacing the front
impact sensor.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for at least three minutes before beginning work.
2. Disconnect Front Impact Sensor connector. 3. Remove the FIS mounting bolt then remove the
Front Impact Sensor.
Installation
CAUTION:
- Ensure that the harness is installed and routed properly to prevent damage to the wiring.
- Do not turn the ignition switch ON and do not connect the battery cable while replacing the front
impact sensor.
1. Install the new Front Impact Sensor with bolt then connect the SRS harness connector to the
Front Impact Sensor.
Tightening torque : 1.0 - 1.4 kgf.m (9.5 - 13.6 Nm, 7.0 - 10.0 lb.ft)
2. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 3. After installing the Front Impact Sensor, confirm proper
system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON the SRS indicator light should be turned on
for about six seconds and then go off.

Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor (FIS) > Page 1209
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor (SIS)
Components
Repair Procedures
Removal
Front Side Impact Sensor
CAUTION:
- Removal of the airbag must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described

previously.
- Before disconnecting the side impact sensor connector(s), disconnect the side airbag
connector(s).
- Do not turn the ignition switch ON and do not connect the battery cable while replacing the side
impact sensor.
2. Remove the door scuff trim. 3. Remove the center pillar trim. 4. Disconnect the Side Impact
Sensor connector. 5. Remove the SIS mounting bolt then remove the Side Impact Sensor.
Rear Side Impact Sensor
2. Remove the rear pillar trim. 3. Disconnect the Side Impact Sensor connector. 4. Remove the SIS
mounting bolt then remove the Side Impact Sensor.
Installation
Front Side Impact Sensor
CAUTION:
- Ensure that the harness is installed and routed properly to prevent damage to the wiring.
- Do not turn the ignition switch ON and do not connect the battery cable while replacing the side
impact sensor.
1. Install the new Side Impact Sensor with the bolt then connect the SRS harness connector to the
Side Impact Sensor.
2. Install the center pillar trim. 3. Install the door scuff trim. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
5. After installing the Side Impact Sensor, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch
ON, the SRS indicator light should be turned on
Rear Side Impact Sensor
1. Be sure that the battery negative cable is disconnected. 2. Install the new Side Impact Sensor
with the bolt then connect the SRS harness connector to the Side Impact Sensor.
3. Install the rear pillar trim. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. After installing the Side
Impact Sensor, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON, the SRS indicator
light should be turned on

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations
Components
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Description and Operation
Description
The SRSCM shall monitor the status of the driver and front passenger seat belt buckle. The
SRSCM provides one pin each for the driver and front passenger seat belt buckle status input. The
seat belt buckle circuit operates from internal boost voltage supplied by the SRSCM, and uses
chassis ground for the signal return. The buckle status shall modify the SRSCM deployment. If the
buckle status is unbuckled, the corresponding pretensioner will be deactivated.
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
Seat Belt Switch
1. Remove the connector from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between terminals.
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Service and Repair Components and Components Location
Components
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Service and Repair Repair Procedures
Removal
2. Remove the front seat assembly. 3. Remove the seat recliner cover.
4. Loosen the seat belt buckle mounting bolt and remove the seat belt buckle switch.
Installation
CAUTION:
Ensure that the harness is installed and routed properly to prevent damage to the wiring.
2. Remove the ignition key from the vehicle. 3. Install the seat belt buckle switch.
Tightening Torque: 4.0 - 5.5 kgf.m (28.9 - 39.8 lb.ft)
4. Install the seat recliner cover with two screws. 5. Install the front seat assembly. 6. Reconnect
the battery negative cable. 7. After installing the Seat Belt Buckle Switch, confirm proper system
operation:
Turn the ignition switch ON, the SRS indicator should be turned on for about six seconds and then
go off.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor
Seat Occupant Sensor: Locations
Components
Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation
Description
In contrast to the initial one-stage airbag systems, newer restraint systems involve complex logic to
select, or alternatively suppress, various levels of safety system deployment. Inherent to an
Advanced Restraint System is the ability to discern information regarding passenger occupancy. It
is intended that these inputs be provided through the OC system. The object of such safety system
is to reduce the risk and level of injuries by automatically adapting the airbag(s) and seat belt
pretensioner to the driving status of the vehicle, its occupants, and the crash severity. The current
OC system covered in this specification continually senses and classifies the front passenger side
seat. The Occupant Classification System described in this section is Weight Classification System
(WCS) of strain gauge type. It consist of 4 weight sensors and ECU which is classifying weight of
occupant. It is installed on the seat leg assembly.
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair
Removal
2. Remove the front passenger seat assembly.
3. Remove the seat leg as an assembly.
Installation
NOTE:
OCS is utilizing a robust weight measuring technology. Thus, if any of the following conditions
occur, WCS reset and accuracy check should be performed.
- The occupant classification ECU or any of the sensors is replaced.
- The vehicle is brought to the repair shop due to an accident or a crash even though the severity
seems to be minor.
- The telltale lamp is not illuminated when the passenger seat is not occupied.
- The telltale lamp is delayed more than 10 seconds to be turned off when an adult passenger
seats in.
- The passenger seat is removed from the vehicle and reassembled.
- Any accessories (side table, seatback table and seat cover, etc) are replaced or installed.
1. Install the OCS equipped seat leg assembly.
2. Install the front passenger seat assembly. 3. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 4. After
installing OCS, perform the WCS reset and accuracy check with the Hi-Scan Pro.
NOTE: Check that seat is not occupied and empty before performing the operation. Make sure that
the back pocket is empty. In order to perform the accuracy check, the command zero operation
should be finished normally. Make sure the procedure be finished normally.
(1) Adjust the seat position according to the table below.
Make sure seat belt not to be buckled, and the belt tension be normal.
(2) Connect the Hi-Scan Pro connector to the data link connector located under the crash pad. (3)
Turn the ignition switch on and power on the Hi-Scan Pro. (4) Perform the WCS reset by using the
Hi-Scan Pro.
[System selection screen] Vehicle Selection_Airbag_02.Weight Classification System_04. WCS
RESET_ENTER (then, Completed is displayed)
(5) Perform the accuracy check by using the Hi-Scan Pro.
[System selection screen] Vehicle Selection_Airbag_02.Weight Classification System_04. WCS

RESET_ESC
(6) Confirm the measured weight is within the standard value. And then press "ESC".
specification: -2.0kg ~ 2.0kg (-4.4lb ~ 4.4lb)
(7) Place a 37kg (81.57lb) weight on the passenger front seat. (8) Confirm that the result of
accuracy check is within the standard value.
specification: 35kg ~ 39kg (77.16lb ~ 85.98lb)
NOTE: -
When performing the accuracy check, use a solid metal weight and place it at the center of the
seat. If the weight made from liquid is used or the weight slides, the check result may not be
accurate, and could result in false readings.
- When the measured weight deviates from the standard value, check again all the fastening bolts
are tightened properly and make sure there
is no interference. During the tightening, be careful not to deform the seat rail or seat structure. If
the accuracy check is still not inside the standard value, replace the seat leg assembly.
- When WCS reset operation not finished normally, replace the seat leg assembly.
5. After installing the OCS, confirm proper system operation : Turn the ignition switch ON, the SRS
indicator should be turned on for about six
seconds and then go off. Telltale lamp will turn on for 4 seconds and be turned off for 3 seconds.
After the 7 seconds, it shall remain off if the OCS does not require suppression and the passenger
airbag is enabled.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor
Seat Position Sensor: Locations
Components
Seat Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Description
The STPS operates via a non-contacting magnetic proximity sensing device combined with a
simple electronic circuit resulting in the ability of producing two separate and distinct logic level
signals. The STPS output signal is altered by the proximity of a separate ferro-magnetic shunt,
which is linked via the seat track. The logic signal produced is the result of the proximity device
being activated or deactivated. When the seat is in the forward position zone of the track, the
sensor gives a low current (prohibit) signal. When the seat is in the rear position zone of the track,
it gives a high current (enable) signal.
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Components and Components Location
Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair Components and Components Location
Components
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Components and Components Location > Page 1232
Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair Repair Procedures
Removal
2. Remove the front seat assembly. 3. Loosen the two STPS screws, then remove the STPS after
disconnecting the STPS connector.
Installation
CAUTION:
Ensure that the harness is installed and routed properly to prevent damage to the wiring.
2. Remove the ignition key from the vehicle. 3. Install the STPS with two screws. 4. Install the front
seat assembly. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 6. After installing the Seat Track Position
Sensor, confirm proper system operation:
Turn the ignition switch ON, the SRS indicator should be turned on for about six seconds and then
go off.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Replacement
connector.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations
Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor
System - Wheel Sensor Service Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Wheel Sensor Service
Precautions
Group: SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Number: 08-SS-005
Date: JULY, 2008
Model: ALL
Subject: CAUTIONS DURING TPMS (TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM) WHEEL

SENSOR SERVICE
DESCRIPTION:
This bulletin provides service procedures that help protect TPMS wheel sensors from
service-related damage.
Case # 1: TPMS valve stem breakage
The valve stem may break during tire inflation or deflation while using a long air-filling nozzle tube
as shown.
Case # 2: TPMS valve stem bursts
CAUTION:
System - Wheel Sensor Service Precautions > Page 1270
DO NOT reuse the valve core if it has been removed. If the valve core has been removed, install
only a NON BRASS type valve core as a replacement.
Cautions during TPMS sensor removal and installation:
1. Removal:
^ Start unseating the tire bead about 6 inches (15cm) from the TPMS valve stem.
^ Make sure that the tool does not touch the TPMS sensor while unseating the tire bead.
^ When unfastening the TPMS sensor, hold it securely without rocking.
2. Installation:
^ Do not exceed the allowed torque and DO NOT use electric or pneumatic tools. Tightening torque
= 3.0 lb. ft. (4 Nm, 0.4 Kg. m)
^ Attach the sensor to the rim firmly.
^ Hold the sensor and assemble the valve stem to the sensor by hand.
^ Secure the TPMS sensor by rotating the valve stem clockwise with a torque wrench.
^ After installing the TPMS sensor, check if it is attached to the rim firmly.
System - Wheel Sensor Service Precautions > Page 1271
^ Start seating the tire bead about 15cm (6 inches) from the TPMS valve stem.
^ Make sure that the tool does not touch the TPMS sensor while seating the tire bead.
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1272
Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
Description
1. Mode
(1) Stationary/Rolling mode
A. Measure pressure and temperature every 4 seconds. B. Measure acceleration every 60

seconds. C. High line TPMS sensors transmit data every 60 seconds while awake.
(2) Sleep mode
A. This state is a Low current consumption state. B. Sensors are in this state when they first arrive
at the dealership (either on the vehicle or as replacement spares). C. In this state, the sensor does
not measure pressure / temperature / battery level. D. The sensor will not transmit in this state
unless requested to do so by the initiate command or woken by acceleration > 20 mph. E. Measure
acceleration every 60 seconds. F. High line sensors return to this state if no LFI signals and the tire
remains stationary for >= 10 minutes to conserve battery power.
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Tire Pressure Sensor: Procedures
Sensor Initiating Procedure
1. Read the four sensor's ids starting with sensor 1 (1 normally front left, 2 front right, 3 rear left, 4
rear right).
2. Connect 'TPMS exciter' to the diagnostic connector.
3. Register the four sensor's ids to the receiver.
4. Disconnect diagnostic link. 5. Cycle Ignition, wait 4 minutes and check that Normal Receiver
State is now indicated.
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page
1275
Tire Pressure Sensor: Removal and Replacement
Removal
Tire Removal
1. Deflate tire & remove balance weights.
CAUTION: -
The tire bead should be broken approx. 180° from the valve side of the wheel. The bead breaker
should not be set too deep.
- Avoid tire/tool contact with the valve on dismount.
- Dismount should end near the valve.

Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page
1276
ERROR: undefined
OFFENDING COMMAND: ‘~
STACK:
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's
P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N > Page 1290
Service Procedure
c below.

Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
c below.

Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
1303
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest: > 09-AT-016 > Aug > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement
Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh
Engagement
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-016
Date AUGUST, 2009
Model 1999-SONATA 2001-ELANTRA, SANTA FE & XG 2003-TIBURON 2005-TUCSON

2006-AZERA 2007-ENTOURAGE
Subject AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES P0715, P0716, P0717,

P0720, P0721 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
This TSB updates TSB 07-40-016 to add repair information (Step 6).
An improperly functioning input speed sensor or output speed sensor may result in the following
conditions:
^ "Check Engine" light on
^ Harsh P-R or P-D engagement shock
^ Transaxle in 3rd gear fail-safe
^ Diagnostic trouble codes

Interest: > 09-AT-016 > Aug > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement > Page 1312
PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Using a GDS, check for DTCs in both the "Engine" and "Automatic Transaxle" menus. Record
the DTC and description.
2. From the GDS, select:
^ Vehicle
^ "Auto Transaxle" menu

^ "Current Data"
^ "Input speed sensor" and "output speed sensor". Drive the vehicle and monitor the input and
output speed sensors. If the sensors show:
^ Continuous output, the wiring currently has no open/shorts. Go to Step 6.
^ No output, go to Step 3
3. Check the wiring harness visually for an open circuit or short circuit to ground. Check for a
pinched harness at the PCM/TCM attachment bolts.
4. Disconnect the connectors at the input and output speed sensor and PCM/TCM. Check for bent
pins or pins not fully inserted into the connector.
5. If a harness open/short is found, repair or replace the ECM control harness between the
PCM/TCM and transaxle and go to Step 8. If not, go to Step 6.
6. P0722 ONLY: For 2006~ Sonata, 2007~ Santa Fe, 2007~ Entourage and 2006~ Azera vehicles,
check the ground bolt at the location shown. Confirm the threads are clean and the bolt is tight.
Interest: > 09-AT-016 > Aug > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement > Page 1313
7. If the ground bolts are clean and tight, follow the repair procedure shown above.
8. Drive the vehicle for two key-on to key-off driving cycles. If the codes:
^ Do not set again, return the vehicle to the customer.
^ Set again, go to step 8.
9. Exchange a PCM or TCM from a similar year and model vehicle (excluding vehicles with
immobilizer). If the codes:
^ Set again, replace the control wiring harness.
^ Do not set again, replace the PCM or TCM.
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-AT-016 > Aug > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh
Engagement
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe
Mode/Harsh Engagement
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-016
Date AUGUST, 2009


P0720, P0721 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
conditions:

Engagement > Page 1319
PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
^ Vehicle

^ "Current Data"
Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-AT-010 > Jun > 09 > A/T - Speed Sensor Identification/Application
Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Speed Sensor
Identification/Application
Number 09-AT-010
Date JUNE, 2009

DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
PARTS INFORMATION
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other
Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-AT-010 > Jun > 09 > A/T - Speed Sensor Identification/Application
Number 09-AT-010
Date JUNE, 2009

DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
PARTS INFORMATION
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Speed Sensor
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Speed Sensor > Page
1332
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass
Element Switch > Component Information > Locations
Element Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rear Glass Defogger Switch
Heated Glass Element Switch: Testing and Inspection Rear Glass Defogger Switch
Inspection
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the center facia panel, console lower
cover and center air vent (A) after loosening screws. Take care not to damage fixing clips.
3. Remove the center facia panel switch and air control panel (A) after loosening screws.
4. Disconnect the air control panel connector (A).

Element Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rear Glass Defogger Switch > Page 1339
Heated Glass Element Switch: Testing and Inspection Windshield Deicer Switch
Inspection
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the console lower cover (A).
3. Remove the center facia panel(A) after loosening screws. Take care not to damage fixing clips.
4. Remove the windshield deicer switch from the center facia panel switch.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Quarter Glass Switch LH
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Quarter Glass Switch LH > Page 1344
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Front Door
Replacement
Power Window Switch Replacement
1. Remove the front door trim. 2. Loosen the mounting screws (B). 3. Disconnect the connector (A).
4. Remove the power window switch (A).
5. Installation is the reverse the removal.

Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door > Page 1349
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Power Windows
Replacement
Driver/assist Door Module (DDM/ADM)
1. Remove (-) negative battery terminal. 2. Remove the front door trim panel. 3. Disconnect the
door module mounting screws (5EA) after disconnecting the module connectors (3EA) from the
motor.
Sliding Power Window Switch
1. Remove (-) negative battery terminal. 2. Disconnect the connector (B) after removing the sliding
power window switch (A) from the B pillar trim (C).
Quarter Glass Switch
1. Remove (-) negative battery terminal. 2. Disconnect the connector (B) after removing the quarter
glass switch (A) from the rear cargo area luggage trim.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Rain Sensor
Rain Sensor: Description and Operation
Description
The Rain sensing windshield wiper system is a wiper system that, in addition to providing normal
wiper functions off, mist, manual low speed, manual high speed, and wash, provides automatic
control of automatic intermittent automatic low, and automatic high speeds. When the ignition key
is in the ON position, the rain sensor will be activated.
System Function
Basic Principle
Emitted Beam from luminosity diode is reflected entirely against the windshield exterior, and then
turn into photo diode. If there is water on the windshield exterior, beam separates optically, and the
degree of remained beam is measured in the photo diode. If there is water in the windshield, it
means the beam is not reflected at all. The degree of lost beam indicates the degree of the glass
surface wetness.
NOTE: Rain sensor consist of two luminosity diode, two photo diode, optic fiber and coupling pad.
Operation Control
Wiper ECU transmits the signal as a rain sensor, and then the rain sensor perceives the rainwater
to transmit to the wiping order wiper ECU, wiper ECU controls the wiper motor according to the
signal.
Contact Influence
The rain sensor can malfunction due to the following conditions :
- Contamination of the measurement surface.
- Air bubbles between the windshield and the coupling pad contact surface.
- The movement of coupling pad by vibration.
- Damaged wiper blade.
Auto Operation
1. Operation Condition
2. Safety Function
A. When there is an ice in the sensing field, the rain sensor cannot recognize the correct working
condition.
NOTE: Do not operate the rain sensing wipers unless the windshield is completely clear of ice and
snow.
B. Glass damage : rain sensor cannot perceive the damaged windshield within the sensing field. C.
The rain sensor will not operate properly if detached from the windshield D. If the wiper ECU does
not transmit any effective data in 5 seconds, the rain sensor turns off LED. E. If the intermittent
wiper signal is interrupted for >2 sec, the wipers are moved to the parking position. F. If a rain
sensor signal communication error lasts for > 5sec, the wipers are moved into the parking position.
G. If the rain sensor transmits an error to the wiper ECU, the wiper ECU stops the AUTO function
after 4.5 seconds.
Rain Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
1. Wiper blade
Check the wear of wiper blade. If it is excessively worn, wipe out clean to sense the rain amount
accurately.
2. Coupler
Ensure the coupler surface on the windshield is free of bubbles. Verify that the coupler is properly
positioned.
3. Glass
Check the windshield glass surface beyond the sensing range for the excessive wear, scratch or
crack. Although the sensor compensates for wear to a certain level, sensor fails to sense
accurately if it exceeds a certain level. This is confirmed by the self-diagnosis of sensor.
4. Exterior cover
Ensure the exterior cover of the rain sensor is properly installed.
5. Spring clip
Check the spring clip after removal of exterior cover if the rain sensor is disconnected from coupler.
6. Connector
(1) Check the terminal inside the connector and wiring for compression, and check the terminal
whether it is inserted and locked correctly. (2) In addition, check the wiring connector and rain
sensor connector for assembly and confirm to prevent poor connection
Rain Sensor: Service and Repair
Removal
CAUTION:
The rain sensor may not operate properly if contaminated. Protect the rain sensor surface by not
removing the cover until installation time. The coupling pad on the rain sensor surface has
adhesive strength. Take care when installing the sensor. If the sensor is separated from the
windshield by force, the sensor or windshield may be damaged. Take care when removing the
sensor.
1. Remove the sensor cover. When removing it, make sure take care to prevent damage. To
remove it, press back the locking hook using the cover
hole using an appropriate tool.
2. When removing rain sensor from the bracket, open the spring clip using the (-)driver, and then
remove.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the sensor. 4. Rain sensor is fitted with 2 spring
slides by clip type on the front glass, it can be replaced easily. When replacing the front glass, take
away the rain
sensor from the existing glass. After then attach it to new one again.
Installation
NOTE:
- In case of the windshield with reflection layer which reflects the infrared rays in sensing field,
remove the reflection layer from the rain sensor mounting position prior to installation.
- Bracket and spring slide need for installing the rain sensor, it is covered by sensor cover.
1. Install the rain sensor bracket to the windshield glass using the tape
2. Rain sensor Installation
The two springs should be closed simultaneously. Once closed, press the housing forward to
ensure proper adhesion of the sensor to the windshield.
3. Connect the rain sensor connector, and then install the sensor cover.
CAUTION: It is very important that the coupling pad pushes against the windshield completely to
prevent bubbles from forming at the contact surface.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid
Level Switch > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
With the rear wiper & washer switch in each position, make sure that continuity exists between the
terminals below. If continuity is not as specified, replace the multifunction switch.
Rear Wiper & Washer Switch

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
Check for continuity between the terminals while operating the wiper and washer switch. If it is not
normal condition, replace wiper and wiper switch.
Wiper Switch
Washer Switch
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1368
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
Replacement
1. Remove the steering column upper and lower shrouds (A) after removing 3 screws.
2. Remove the wiper switch (A) by pushing the lock pin (B) after disconnecting the connector.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Drift/Pull Diagnosis/Repair
Alignment: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Drift/Pull Diagnosis/Repair
Number: 08-SS-004
Date: JULY, 2008
Model: ALL
Subject: DIAGNOSIS AND CORRECTION OF VEHICLE PULL
This bulletin supersedes TSB 05-50-012 to include 2009 models
DESCRIPTION:
Several factors may cause vehicle pull, both vehicle related and external conditions. The purpose
of this bulletin is to assist in identifying the vehicle related conditions that cause pull and how to
correct those conditions.
CAUSES OF VEHICLE PULL:
Vehicle pull is the tendency of the vehicle to drift right or left while driving in a straight ahead
direction on a straight road at a constant speed with no pressure on the steering wheel. This pull or
drift may be gradual and can always be compensated for by inputs through the steering wheel. One
or more of the following conditions may cause the vehicle to pull:
Non-vehicle conditions that may cause the vehicle to pull: ^
Cambered road surfaces - Most highways are built with cambered or "crowned" surfaces to drain
rain water. Sometimes the road camber is visually noticeable. Other times, it is not. The vehicle
may tend to pull to the left or right, depending on the camber of the road surface.
Cross-winds - A sometimes overlooked, yet possible cause of steering drift is cross-winds. Side
winds at higher vehicle speeds may cause vehicle pull. Please do not rule out cross-winds when
diagnosing a vehicle pull.
Vehicle pull caused by these two conditions is not related to vehicle adjustments and no repair
should be made.
Vehicle conditions that may cause the vehicle to pull: ^
Tire inflation pressure - As small as a 2 pounds/square inch tire inflation pressure difference
between the right and left tires may cause a vehicle to pull. Be sure to check the tire pressure
before the tires are warmed up prior to attempting more extensive diagnosis.
Wheel alignment - Slightly out of specification wheel alignment causes very few vehicles to pull.
Therefore, if the vehicle wheel alignment has been adjusted as close as possible to specification,
DO NOT attempt to correct the vehicle pull by changing the wheel alignment angles by bending
suspension components or other non-approved methods.
Uneven brake adjustment - If one of the four brakes is dragging, the vehicle may pull to the side of
the dragging brake. Verify that none of the brakes are dragging and that they are adjusted correctly
prior to attempting more extensive diagnosis.
^
Incorrect vehicle trim height - If the trim height of the vehicle is not equal on all sides, the vehicle
may pull to the side of the lower trim height. Check and adjust the trim height of the vehicle as
necessary. Please note that a slight variation in the vehicle trim height seldom causes a noticeable
vehicle pull.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Drift/Pull Diagnosis/Repair > Page 1374
^ Tire construction - The way in which the tire is built can produce vehicle pull. An example of this
is the placement of the under tread belt. An off-center radial tire belt can cause the tire to develop a
side force while rolling straight down the road and the tire will tend to roll like a cone. To correct this
condition, please use the flow chart. This chart provides the sequence of procedures designed to
be performed for all conditions of vehicle pull.
^ Tire size - Different size tires or different make of tires, on either axles, may cause a vehicle pull.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1375
Alignment: Specifications
Specifications
Wheel Alignment
Alignment: Service and Repair
Wheel Alignment
When using commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment (caster, camber,
toe) to inspect the front wheel alignment, always position the car on a level surface with the front
wheels facing straight ahead. Prior to inspection, make sure that the front suspension and steering
system are in normal operating condition and that the wheels and tires face straight ahead and the
tires are inflated to the specified pressure.
Toe
Toe is a measurement of how much the front of the wheels are turned in or out from the
straight-ahead position.
When the wheels are turned in toward the front of the vehicle, toe is positive (+) (toe in). When the
wheels are turned out toward the front of the vehicle, toe is negative(-) (toe out). Toe is measured
in degrees, from side to side, and totaled.
[Front]
Toe-in(B-A or angle a+b) is adjusted by turning the tie rod turnbuckles. Toe-in on the left front
wheel can be reduced by turning the tie rod toward the rear of the car. Toe- in change is adjusted
by turning the tie rods for the right and left heels simultaneously at the same amount as follows.
Standard value :
Toe-in (B-A) mm (in) : 0 ± 2 (0 ± 0.0787)
NOTE:
- Toe-in adjustment should be made by turning the right and left tie rods at the same amount.
- When adjusting toe-in, loosen the outer bellows clip to prevent twisting the bellows.
- After the adjustment, tighten the tie rod end lock nuts firmly and reinstall the bellows clip.
- Adjust each toe-in to be the range of ±1mm.
Tie rod(A) Specified torque :
70 - 80N.m (7 - 8kgf.m, 50.6 - 57.8lb-ft)
[Rear]
Standard value :
Toe-in (B-A) mm (in) : 3.5 ± 2 (0.1378 ± 0.0787)

Adjust the toe-in by turning the cambolt of the assist arm.
Left cambolt : Clockwise -> toe-in Right cambolt : Clockwise -> toe-out The variation of toe by a
rotation of the cambolt : About 3.2 mm (0.126 in)
CAUTION:
- Each toe should be within ±1 mm (± 0.039 in). If the difference between right and left is not within
+2mm (0.079 in), repeat adjustment.
- After adjusting the cambolt, tighten the nut to the specified torque.
Specified torque
90 - 120 N.m (9 - 12 kgf.m, 65.1 - 86.8 lb-ft)
Camber
[Front]
Camber is the inward or outward tilting of the wheels at the top.

When the wheel tilts out at the top, then the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts in at the
top, then the camber is negative(-).
Standard value : 0° ± 30' Difference between right and left angle is within 0° 30'
NOTE:
Camber is pre-set at the factory and doesn't need to be adjusted. If the camber is not within the
standard value, replace the bent or damaged parts.
[Rear]
Standard value : -20' ± 30' Difference between right and left angle is within 0° 30'
Adjust the camber by turning the cambolt of the rear upper arm.
Left cambolt : Clockwise -> camber(-) Right cambolt : Clockwise ->camber(+) The variation of
camber by a rotation of the cambolt : About 0°8'35''
Caster
Caster is the tilting of the strut axis either forward or backward from vertical. A backward tilt is
positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Caster is pre-set at the factory and doesn't need to be
adjusted. If the caster is not within the standard value, replace the bent or damaged parts.
Caster :4°05' ± 30'
NOTE:
- The worn loose or damaged parts of the front suspension assembly must be replaced prior to
measuring front wheel alignment.
- Caster are pre-set to the specified value at the factory and don't need to be adjusted.
- If the caster are not within specifications, replace bent or damaged parts.
- The difference of left and right wheels about the the caster must be within the range of 0° ± 30'.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System
Information > Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure Test
Standard
Value.....................................................................................................................................374 ~
384 kpa (3.82 ~ 3.92 kgf/cm2, 54.3 ~ 55.8 psi)
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection

Fuel Pressure Test Part 1 - 3


Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information
> Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Specification
Service Standard
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure
Release > System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Test

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component
Firing Order: Specifications
Firing Order 1-2-3-4-5-6
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One
Cylinder > Component Information > Locations
Number One Cylinder: Locations
Number One Cylinder

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Spark Plug: Electrical Specifications
Spark Plug
Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 1404
Spark Plug: Mechanical Specifications
Specification
Spark Plugs
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark Plug
Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection
On-vehicle Inspection
Inspect Spark Plug
1. Remove the ignition coil connector(A).
NOTE: When removing the ignition coil connector, pull the lock pin(A) and push the clip(B).
2. Remove the ignition coil(B).
Remove bolt holding down the ignition coil. Remove ignition coil from engine.
3. Using a spark plug socket, remove the spark plug.
CAUTION: Be careful that no contaminates enter through the spark plug holes.
4. Inspect the electrodes (A) and ceramic insulator (B).
Inspection Of Electrodes
5. Check the electrode gap (A).
Standard :
Unleaded : 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.0394 - 0.0433 in.)

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Check
NOTE: This measurement must be done in as short a time as possible.
Compression
pressure...............................................................................................................................1,225 kPa
(12.5 kgf/cm2, 177 psi) - 200 - 250 rpm
Minimum pressure................................................................................................................................
..............................1,078 kPa (11.0 kgf/cm2, 156 psi)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
Compression Pressure Inspection
NOTE:
If there is lack of power, excessive oil consumption or poor fuel economy, measure the
compression pressure.
1. Warm up and stop engine.
Allow the engine to warm up to normal operating temperature.
2. Remove the surge tank. 3. Remove the ignition coil connectors(A) and ignition coils(B).
4. Remove all 6 spark plugs using a 16mm spark plug socket. 5. Check cylinder compression
pressure.
(1) Insert a compression gauge into the spark plug hole. (2) Fully open the throttle. (3) After 7 times
of cranking the engine, measure the compression pressure.
NOTE: Always use a fully charged battery to obtain engine speed of 250 rpm or more.
Repeat steps 1) through 3) for each cylinder.
Compression pressure : 1,225kPa (12.5kgf/cm2, 177psi) - 200 - 250rpm Minimum pressure :

1,078kPa (11.0kgf/cm2, 156psi)
(4) If the cylinder compression in 1 or more cylinders is low, pour a small amount of engine oil into
the cylinder through the spark plug hole and
repeat steps (a) through (c) for cylinders with low compression. A. If adding oil helps the
compression, it is likely that the piston rings and/or cylinder bore are worn or damaged. B. If
pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or seating is improper, or there may be leakage past
the gasket.
6. Reinstall the spark plugs. 7. Install the ignition coil and ignition coil connectors. 8. Install the
surge tank.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Valve Clearance
Valve Clearance
Specification Engine coolant temperature............................................................................................

.......................................................................................20°C [68°F] Limit Intake................................
..............................................................................................................................................0.10 -
0.30 mm (0.0039 - 0.0118 in.) Exhaust................................................................................................
...........................................................................0.20 - 0.40 mm (0.0079 - 0.0157 in.)
Engine coolant temperature.................................................................................................................

...................................................................20°C[68°F] [Specification] Intake.......................................
.......................................................................................................................................0.17 - 0.23
mm (0.0067 - 0.0090 in.) Exhaust........................................................................................................
...................................................................0.27 - 0.33 mm (0.0106 - 0.0129 in.)
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
Valve Clearance Inspection And Adjustment
NOTE:
Inspect and adjust the valve clearance when the engine is cold (Engine coolant temperature :
20°C) and cylinder head is installed on the cylinder block.
1. Remove the engine cover. 2. Remove air cleaner assembly. 3. Remove the surge tank. 4.
Remove the cylinder head cover.
(1) Disconnect the ignition coil connector and remove the ignition coil. (2) Disconnect the breather
pipe assembly(A) from the cylinder head cover.
(3) Loosen the cylinder head cover bolts and then remove the cover(A) and gasket.
5. Set No.1 cylinder to TDC/compression.
(1) Turn the crankshaft pulley and align its groove with the timing mark "T" of the lower timing chain
cover.
(2) Check that the mark(A) of the camshaft timing sprockets are in straight line on the cylinder head
surface as shown in the illustration.
If not, turn the crankshaft one revolution (360°)
NOTE: Do not rotate engine counterclockwise

6. Inspect the valve clearance.
(1) Check only the valve indicated as shown. [No. 1 cylinder : TDC/Compression] measure the
valve clearance.
Measurement method. A. - Using a thickness gauge, measure the clearance between the tappet
and the base circle of camshaft.
- Record the out-of-specification valve clearance measurements. They will be used later to
determine the required replacement adjusting tappet.
Valve clearance Specification Engine coolant temperature : 20°C [68°F] Limit Intake : 0.10 -
0.30mm (0.0039 - 0.0118in.) Exhaust : 0.20 - 0.40mm (0.0079 - 0.0157in.)
(2) Turn the crankshaft pulley one revolution (360°) and align the groove with timing mark "T" of the
lower timing chain cover.
(3) Check only valves indicated as shown. [NO. 4 cylinder : TDC/compression]. Measure the valve
clearance. )
7. Adjust the intake and exhaust valve clearance.
(1) Set the No.1 cylinder to the TDC/compression. (2) Remove the timing chain.
NOTE: Before removing the timing chain, mark the RH/LH timing chain with an identification based
on the location of the sprocket because the identification mark on the chain for TDC(Top Dead
Center) can be erased.
(3) Remove the camshaft bearing caps(A).
(4) Remove the camshaft assembly(A).

(5) Remove MLAs. (6) Measure the thickness of the removed tappet using a micrometer.
(7) Calculate the thickness of a new tappet so that the valve clearance comes within the specified
value.
Valve clearance (Engine coolant temperature: 20°C[68°F]) T : Thickness of removed tappet A :

Measured valve clearance N : Thickness of new tappet Intake : N = T + [A - 0.20mm(0.0079in.)]
Exhaust : N = T + [A - 0.30mm (0.0118in.)]
(8) Select a new tappet with a thickness as close as possible to the calculated value.
NOTE: Shims are available in 41size increments of 0.015mm (0.0006in.) from 3.00mm (0.118in.) to
3.600mm (0.1417in.)
(9) Place a new tappet on the cylinder head.
NOTE: Applying engine oil at the selected tappet on the periphery and top surface.
(10) Install the intake and exhaust camshaft. (11) Install camshaft bearing caps(A).
Assemble camshaft bearing caps as the order below.
Tightening torque 5.9Nm(0.6kgf.m, 4.3lb-ft) - 1st step 9.80 - 11.76Nm(1.0 - 1.2kgf.m, 7.23 -
8.68lb-ft) - 2nd step
(12) Install the timing chain. (13) Turn the crankshaft two turns in the operating direction(clockwise)
and realign crankshaft sprocket and camshaft sprocket timing marks(A).
(14) Recheck the valve clearance.
Valve clearance (Engine coolant temperature: 20°C[68°F]) [Specification] Intake : 0.17 - 0.23mm
(0.0067 - 0.0090in.) Exhaust : 0.27 - 0.33mm (0.0106 - 0.0129in.)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Cabin Air Filter: Description and Operation
Description
This has particle filter which eliminates foreign materials and odor. The particle filter includes odor
filter as well as conventional dust filter to ensure comfortable interior environment.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Description and
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
Replacement
1. Open the glove box (B).
Lower the glove box down completely by removing the glove box stopper (A) to the glove box.
2. Remove the filter cover (A) with pushing the knob. 3. Replace the air filter (B), install it after
making sure of the direction of air filter.
NOTE: In case of driving in an air-polluted area or rugged terrain, check and replace the air filter as
frequently as possible.
Replacement period: 15,000 km (9320 mile)

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair
Replace
1. Remove the rear left wheel house inner cover.
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A).
3. Remove the fuel tank air filter(B) with unscrewing the mounting bolts (C). 4. Install a new fuel
tank air filter and connect the canister close valve connector.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service
and Repair
Fuel Pressure Test

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Oil Filter: Service and Repair Components and Components Location
Components
Components and Components Location > Page 1435
Oil Filter: Service and Repair Engine Oil and Filter Replacement
Engine Oil And Filter Replacement
CAUTION:
- Prolonged and repeated contact with mineral oil will result in the removal of natural fats from the
skin, leading to dryness, irritation and dermatitis. In addition, used engine oil contains potentially
harmful contaminants which may cause skin cancer.
- Exercise caution in order to minimize the length and frequency of contact of your skin to used oil.
Wear protective clothing and gloves. Wash your skin thoroughly with soap and water, or use
water-less hand cleaner, to remove any used engine oil. Do not use gasoline, thinners, or solvents.
- In order to preserve the environment, used oil and used oil filter must be disposed of only at
designated disposal sites.
1. Park the car on level ground.
Start the engine and let it warm up.
2. Turn the engine off and open the hood.
Remove the engine cover.
3. Loosen the oil filter cap by turning it clockwise with SST (09263-3C100). Allow 5 minutes for the
oil in the filter assembly to drain.
4. Drain the engine oil.
A. Remove the oil filler cap. B. After lifting the car, remove the oil drain plug and drain the oil into a
container.
5. Replace oil filter.
A. Disconnect the oil filter cap from oil filter body. B. Remove the oil filter element. C. Check and
clean the oil filter installation surface. D. Check the part number of the new oil filter is as same as
old one. E. Install new oil filter element(A) and two new O-rings(B).
F. Apply clean engine oil to the new O-rings.
Lightly screw the oil filter cap into place, and tighten it until the O-ring contacts the seat.
G. Finally tighten it again by specified tightening torque.
Tightening torque 24.50Nm (2.5kgf.m, 18.08lb-ft)
6. Refill with engine oil.
A. Install the oil drain plug with a new gasket.
Tightening torque 34.3 - 44.1Nm (3.5 - 4.5kgf.m, 25.3 - 32.5lb-ft)
B. Fill with fresh engine oil, after removing the engine oil level gauge.
Capacity Total : 6.0L(6.34U.S.qts,5.27lmp.qts)

Oil pan : 5.5L(5.81U.S.qts,4.83lmp.qts) Drain and refill including oil filter :
5.2L(5.49U.S.qts,4.57lmp.qts) Oil quality : Above API SJ/SL or SAE 5W-20
C. Install the oil filler cap and oil level gauge.
7. Start the engine and check to be sure no oil is leaking from the drain plug or oil filter. 8. Recheck
engine oil level.
Oil Filter: Service and Repair Oil Filter Assembly
Removal
Oil Filter Assembly
1. Loosen the oil filter cap by turning it counter clockwise with SST (09263-3C100). Allow 5 minutes
for the oil in the filter assembly to drain. 2. Remove surge tank and intake manifold. 3. Disconnect
oil pressure switch connector. 4. Drain the engine coolant. 5. Disconnect water hoses from ETC. 6.
Remove water temperature control assembly. 7. Disconnect water vent hose(A). 8. Remove oil
filter body cover(B).
9. Remove oil filter body.
NOTE: Be careful of the knock sensor connector.
Installation
Oil Filter Assembly
1. Install oil filter body and new O-rings.
NOTE: -
All rubber gasket must be no damaged by assembling parts.
- Be careful of the knock sensor connector.
- Always use a new O-ring
2. Install oil filter body cover(B) and new gasket on the oil filter body.
3. Connect water vent hose(A)
4. Install water temperature control assembly. 5. Connect water hoses on the ETC.
6. Connect oil pressure switch connector. 7. Install intake manifold and surge tank. 8. Fill with
engine coolant. 9. Start engine and check for leaks.
10. Recheck engine coolant level.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair
Components
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Page 1443
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Hose/Line HVAC: Locations
Component Location
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Components and Components Location
Component Location
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Repair Procedures
Replacement
1. Discharge refrigerant from refrigeration system. 2. Replace faulty tube or hose.
CAUTION: Cap the open fittings immediately to keep moisture or dirt out of the system.
3. Tighten joint of bolt or nut to specified torque.
CAUTION: Connections should not be torque tighter than the specified torque.
4. Evacuate air in refrigeration system and charge system with refrigerant.
Specified amount: 950 ± 25g (2.04 - 2.15 lbs)
5. Inspect for leakage of refrigerant.
Using a gas leak detector, check for leakage of refrigerant.
6. Inspect A/C operation.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Diagrams
Power Steering Line/Hose: Diagrams
Components
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Components and Components Location
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Components and Components Location
Components
Repair > Components and Components Location > Page 1455
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Repair Procedures
Replacement
1. Drain the power steering fluid. 2. Disconnect the pressure tube (A) and suction tube (B) from the
power steering oil pump.
Tightening torque : 55 - 65N.m (4.5 - 5.5kgf.m, 40 - 47lb-ft)
3. Disconnect the pressure tube (A) and return tube (B) from the valve body housing.
Tightening torque : 12 - 18N.m (1.2 - 1.8kgf.m, 9 - 13lb-ft)
4. Remove the brackets of the pressure tube and hose from the sub-frame.
5. Remove the bracket of the return tube and hose.
6. Remove the under cover and then loosen the oil cooler tube bracket bolts.
NOTE: Be sure to connect between a tube and a hose as shown in the illustration.
Repair > Components and Components Location > Page 1456
7. Installation is the reverse of removal. 8. After installation, bleed the power steering system.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Brakes - Brake Fluid Adding/Changing Precautions
Brake Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Brake Fluid Adding/Changing Precautions
Group BRAKES
Number 10-SS-003
Date FEBRUARY, 2010
Model ALL
Subject BRAKE FLUID PRECAUTIONS - ADDING OR CHANGING FLUID
DESCRIPTION:
This bulletin provides guidelines that should be followed before removing the brake fluid reservoir
cap when adding or changing brake fluid.
IMPORTANT:
Make sure to completely remove foreign substances from around brake fluid reservoir and cap
before opening the reservoir cap. Not following this may cause contamination of brake fluid.
VEHICLES AFFECTED: All models
1. SERVICE PROCEDURE:
^ Location of brake reservoir cap
There are two potential locations for the brake fluid reservoir shown above.
HOW TO REMOVE FOREIGN SUBSTANCES FROM AROUND THE BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR
CAP:
1. If the brake fluid reservoir cap is located in front of cowl top cover, first wipe foreign substances
off the brake fluid reservoir and its cap and then open the cap to add or change brake fluid.
> Brakes - Brake Fluid Adding/Changing Precautions > Page 1462
2. If the brake fluid reservoir cap is located under cowl top cover, first wipe foreign substances off
the lower surface of the cowl top cover, the brake fluid reservoir and its cap and then open the cap.
3. If brake fluid reservoir is equipped with oil filter, add or change brake fluid with the oil filter
inserted. DO NOT remove the oil filter while filling brake fluid.
> Page 1463
Brake Fluid: Specifications
Brake Fluid Type
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
......................................DOT 3, DOT 4 or equivalent
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Engine Coolant
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
.................................. 7.8L (8.2 US qts, 6.8 Imp Qts)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Coolant Type
Type .......................................................................................................................................50%
Ethylene glycol base for aluminum, 50% distilled water.
Note: Do not mix different types of coolant.
Do not use additional rust inhibitors or anti rust products; they may not be compatible with the
coolant.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
A/T - Specified ATF and Additive Usage Information
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Specified ATF and Additive Usage Information
Group AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-006
Date: MARCH, 2009
Model ALL
Subject HYUNDAI SPECIFIED ATF AND ADDITIVE USAGE
DESCRIPTION:
Hyundai Motor Company approves of the use of only the ATF specified in the vehicle's owner's
manual. Use of other ATF may result in improper shift quality or other driveability issues.
Hyundai Motor Company does not approve of the use of any aftermarket ATF additives.
Hyundai Owner's Manuals state:
"Use only Hyundai Genuine ATF or other brands meeting the specification approved by Hyundai
Motor Company."
The approved ATF and the ATF level checking procedure are shown above.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
NOTE:Check that the fluid level is at the HOT mark on the oil level gauge. If the fluid level is lower
than this, add more fluid until the level reaches the
HOT mark.
ATF ......................................................................................................................................................
............................................... 11.52 US qts (10.9 L)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Type ....................................................................................................................... Hyundai Genuine

ATF SP-III, Diamond ATF SP-III, or SK ATF SP-III
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1476
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair
Service Adjustment Procedure
Automatic Transaxle Fluid Inspection
1. Drive the vehicle until the fluid reaches normal operating temperature [70 - 80°C(158 - 176°F)].
2. Place the vehicle on a level surface. 3. Move the selector lever through all gear positions. This
will fill the torque converter and the hydraulic system with fluid and move the selector
lever to the "N" (Neutral) or "P"(Park) position.
4. Before removing the oil level gauge, wipe all contaminants from around the oil level gauge. Then
take out the oil level gauge and check the
condition of the fluid.
NOTE: If the fluid smells as if it is burning, it means that the fluid has been contaminated by fine
particles from the bushes and friction materials, a transaxle overhaul may be necessary.
5. Check that the fluid level is at the HOT mark on the oil level gauge. If the fluid level is low, add
automatic transaxle fluid until the level reaches
the "HOT" mark.
Auto transaxle fluid: DIAMOND ATF SP-III, SK ATF SP-III Quantity : 10.9L (11.5 US qt.)
NOTE: Low fluid level can cause a variety of a abnormal conditions because it allows the pump to
take in air along with fluid. Air trapped in the hydraulic system forms bubbles, which are
compressable. Therefore, pressures will be erratic, causing delayed shifting ,slipping clutches and
brakes, etc. Improper filling can also raise fluid level too high. When the transaxle has too much
fluid, gears churn up foam and acuise the same conditions which occur with low fluid level,
resulting in accelerated deterioration of automatic transaxle fluid. In either case, air bubbles can
cause overheating, and fluid oxidation, which can interfere with normal valve, clutch, and brake
operation. Foaming can also result in fluid escaping from the transaxle vent where it may be
mistaken for a leak.
6. Insert the oil level gauge securely.
NOTE: When new, automatic transmission fluid should be red. The red dye is added so the
assembly plant can identify it as transmission fluid and distinguish it from engine oil or antifreeze.
The red dye, which is not an indicator of fluid quality, is not permanent. As the vehicle is driven the
transmission fluid will begin to look darker. The color may eventually appear light brown.
Replacement
If you have a fluid changer, use this changer to replace the fluid. If you do not, replace it using the
following procedure.
1. Disconnect the hose which connects the transmission and the oil cooler. 2. Start the engine and
let the fluid drain out.
Running conditions :"N" range with engine idling.
CAUTION: The engine should be stopped within one minute after it is started. If the fluid has all
drained out before then, the engine should be stopped at that point.
3. Remove the drain plug(A) from the bottom of the transmission case to drain the fluid.
4. Install the drain plug via the gasket, and tighten it to the specified torque.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1477
Tightening torque : 40 - 50Nm (400 - 500 kgf.cm, 29 - 36 lb-ft)
5. Pour the new fluid in through the oil filler tube.
CAUTION: Stop pouring if the full volume of fluid cannot be poured in.
6. Repeat the procedure in step (2).
NOTE: Check the old fluid for contamination. If it has been contaminated, repeat the steps (5) and
(6).
7. Pour the new fluid in through the oil filler tube. 8. Reconnect the hose which was disconnected in
step (1) above and firmly replace the oil level gauge.(In case of this "replace", this means after
wiping off any dirt around the oil level gauge, insert it into the filler tube.)
9. Start the engine and run it at idle for 1 - 2 minutes.
10. Move the select lever through all positions, and then move it to the "N" position. 11. Drive the
vehicle until the fluid temperature rises to the normal temperature (70 - 80°C(158 - 176°F)), and
then check the fluid level again. The
fluid level must be at the HOT mark.
12. Firmly insert the oil level gauge into the oil filler tube.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil Capacity
Total .....................................................................................................................................................
............................ 6.0L (6.34 US Qts, 5.28 Imp Qts )
Oil Pan .................................................................................................................................................

............................. 5.5L (5.81 US Qts, 4.84 Imp Qts)
Drain and Refill (with filter)

............................................................................................................................................ 5.2L (5.49
US Qts, 4.58 Imp Qts)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Oil
API Classification .................................................................................................................................

.................................................................... SJ or SL
ILSAC Classification ............................................................................................................................

.......................................................... GF-3 or above
Viscosity:
Above -7°C (19.4°F) ............................................................................................................................

..................................................................... 20W-50
Above -13°C (8.6°F) ............................................................................................................................

..................................................................... 15W-40
Above -18°C (-0.4°F) ...........................................................................................................................

.................................................................... 10W-30
Below -18°C (-0.4°F)

.......................................................................................................................................................
5W-20 (recommended) or 5W-30
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1483
Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection
Engine Oil
1. Check engine oil quality.
Check the oil for deterioration, entry of water, discoloring or thinning. If the quality is visibly poor,
replace the oil.
2. Check engine oil level.
After warming up the engine and then 5 minutes after the engine stop, oil level should be between
the "L" and "F" marks on the dipstick. If low, check for leakage and add oil up to the "F" mark.
NOTE: Do not fill with engine oil above the "F" mark.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures
Engine Oil: Procedures
Selection Of Engine Oil
Recommended API classification : Above SJ or SL Recommended SAE viscosity grades : 5W-20 If

5W-20 engine oil is not available, 5W-30 or secondary recommanded engine oil for corresponding
temperature range can be used.
NOTE:
For best performance and maximum protection of all types of operation, select only those
lubricants which :
- Satisfy the requirement of the API classification.
- Have proper SAE grade number for expected ambient temperature range.
Lubricants that do not have both an SAE grade number and API service classification on the
container should not be used.
Procedures > Page 1486
Engine Oil: Removal and Replacement
Components
CAUTION:
container.
Capacity Total : 6.0L(6.34U.S.qts,5.27lmp.qts) Oil pan : 5.5L(5.81U.S.qts,4.83lmp.qts) Drain and

refill including oil filter : 5.2L(5.49U.S.qts,4.57lmp.qts) Oil quality : Above API SJ/SL or SAE 5W-20
engine oil level.
Engine Oil: Overhaul
Removal
Oil Pump
1. Drain engine oil. 2. Using SST(09215-3C000) remove lower oil pan(A).
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the contact surfaces of upper oil pan and lower oil pan.
3. Remove oil pump chain cover(A).
4. Remove oil pump chain sprocket(A).
5. Remove oil pump(A).
Installation
Oil Pump
1. Install oil pump(A).
NOTE:
Always use a new O-ring(B).
2. Install oil pump sprocket(A)and oil pump chain on the oil pump.
3. Install oil pump chain cover(A).
4. Install lower oil pan.
A. Using a gasket scraper, remove all the old packing material from the gasket surfaces. B. Before
assembling the oil pan, the liquid sealant TB1217H should be applied on upper oil pan.
The part must be assembled within 5 minutes after the sealant was applied.
Bead width :2.5mm(0.1in.) But marked area(* ) to be 5.0mm(0.2in.)
CAUTION: -
Ensure the sealing face is clean before assembling two parts.
- Remove harmful foreign matters on the sealing face before applying sealant
- When applying sealant gasket, sealant must not be protruded into the inside of oil pan.
- To prevent leakage of oil, apply sealant gasket ot the inner threads of the bolt holes.
C. Install lower oil pan.

Uniformly tighten the bolts in several passes.
D. After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Power Steering Fluid
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................ PSF-3
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant
Capacity [lbs]........................................................................................................................................
.................................................2.04 - 2.15 (950 ± 25)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
Refrigerant
Type......................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................R-134a
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
Oil Specification
1. The HFC-134a system requires synthetic (PAG) compressor oil whereas the R-12 system
requires mineral compressor oil. The two oils must never
be mixed.
2. Compressor (PAG) oil varies according to compressor model. Be sure to use oil specified for the
model of compressor.
Oil total volume in system:
210 ± 10cc (7.1 ± 0.34 fl.oz)

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Oil Specification
be mixed.
Oil total volume in system:
210±10cc (7.1±0.34 fl.oz)

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page
1504
Refrigerant Oil: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
Oil Specification
be mixed.
Handling of Oil
1. The oil should be free from moisture, dust, metal powder, etc. 2. Do not mix with other oil. 3. The
water content in the oil increases when exposed to the air. After use, seal oil from air immediately.
(HFC-134a Compressor Oil absorbs
moisture very easily.)
4. The compressor oil must be stored in steel containers, not in plastic containers.
Compressor oil check
The oil used to lubricate the compressor is circulating with the refrigerant. Whenever replacing any
component of the system or a large amount of gas leakage occurs, add oil to maintain the original
amount of oil.
Oil total volume in system: 210±10cc (7.1±0.34 fl.oz)
Oil Return Operation
There is close affinity between the oil and the refrigerant. During normal operation, part of the oil
recirculates with the refrigerant in the system. When checking the amount of oil in the system, or
replacing any component of the system, the compressor must be run in advance for oil return
operation. The procedure is as follows:
1. Open all the doors and the engine hood. 2. Start the engine and air conditioning switch to "ON"
and set the blower motor control knob at its highest position. 3. Run the compressor for more than
20 minutes between 800 and 1,000 rpm in order to operate the system. 4. Stop the engine.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair
Bleeding of Brake System
This procedure should be followed to ensure adequate bleeding of air and filling of the ESC unit,
brake lines and master cylinder with brake fluid.
1. Remove the reservoir cap and fill the brake reservoir with brake fluid.
CAUTION: If there is any brake fluid on any painted surface, wash it off immediately.
NOTE: When pressure bleeding, do not depress the brake pedal. Recommended fluid. DOT3 or
DOT4
2. Connect a clear plastic tube to the brake caliper bleeder plug and insert the other end of the tube
into a half filled clear plastic bottle.
3. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector located underneath the dash panel.
4. Select and operate according to the instructions on the scan tool screen.
CAUTION: You must obey the maximum operating time of the ABS motor with the scan tool to
prevent the motor pump from burning.
(1) Select vehicle name. (2) Select Anti-Lock Brake system. (3) Select air bleeding mode. (4) Press
"YES" to operate motor pump and solenoid valve.
(5) Wait 60 sec. before operating the air bleeding again. (If not, you may damage the motor.)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1508
5. Pump the brake pedal several times, and then loosen the bleeder screw until fluid starts to run
out without bubbles. Then close the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat step 5 until there are no more
bubbles in the fluid for each wheel.
7. Tighten the bleeder screw.
Bleed screw tightening torque: 7 - 1 3 N.m (0.7 - 1.3 kgf.m, 5.06 - 9.4 lb-ft)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Precautions
General Precautions
Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service.
Observe the instructions described in this manual, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and
cause damage or injuries.
- Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF and
disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning
work.
NOTE: The contents in the memory are not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the
battery cables are disconnected from the battery.
- Use the replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards as the original parts
and quality. Do not install used SRS parts from another vehicle. Use only new parts when making
SRS repairs.
- Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of
being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation.
- Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always
disconnect the SRS connector.
Airbag Handling And Storage
Do not disassemble the airbags; it has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it
cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the air bag during service, please observe
the following precautions.
- Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up.
- Keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water to prevent damage to the airbag assembly.
- Store the removed airbag on secure, flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding
85°C/185°F).
- Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags, such as measuring resistance.
- Do not position yourself in front of the airbag assembly during removal, inspection, or
replacement.
- Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of the damaged airbag.
- Be careful not to bump or impact the SRS unit or the side impact sensors whenever the ignition
switch is ON, wait at least three minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF before begin work.
- During installation or replacement, be careful not to bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the
area around the SRS unit and the side impact sensor. The airbags could accidentally deploy and
cause damage or injury.
- After a collision in which the airbags were deployed, replace the front airbags and the SRS unit.
After a collision in which the side airbag was deployed, replace the side airbag, the front impact
sensor and side impact sensor on the side where the side airbag deployed and the SRS unit. After
a collision in which the airbags or the side air bags did not deploy, inspect for any damage or any
deformation on the SRS unit and the side
> Page 1512
impact sensors. If there is any damage, replace the SRS unit, the front impact sensor and/or the
side impact sensors.
- Do not disassemble the SRS unit, the front impact sensor or the side impact sensors
- Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the battery negative cable and wait at least three
minutes before beginning installation or replacement of the SRS unit.
- Be sure the SRS unit, the front impact sensor and side impact sensors are installed securely with
the mounting bolts.
- Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit,or the front impact sensor or the side impact sensors and
keep them away from dust.
- Store the SRS unit, the front impact sensor and the side impact sensors in a cool (less than
40°C/104°F) and dry (less than 80% relative humidity, no moisture) area.
Wiring Precautions
SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer covering (except the SRS circuits under the
front seats). Observe the instructions described in this section.
- Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring. If there is an open or damage in SRS
wiring, replace the harness.
- Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched, or interfere with other parts.
- Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean, and grounds are securely fastened for optimum
metal-to-metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to
diagnose.
Precautions For Electrical Inspections
- When using electrical test equipment, insert the probe of the tester into the wire side of the
connector. Do not insert the probe of the tester into the terminal side of the connector, and do not
tamper with the connector.
- Use a u-shaped probe. Do not insert the probe forcibly.
- Use specified service connectors for troubleshooting. Using improper tools could cause an error
in inspection due to poor metal contact.
> Page 1513
Airbag Connector
Connecting
Hold both connector halves and press firmly until the projection (C) of the sleeve-side connector
clicks to lock.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations
Fuse: Locations

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Page 1518

Page 1519

Page 1520

Page 1521

Page 1522

Page 1523

Page 1524

Page 1525
Fuse: Application and ID

Page 1526

Page 1527

Page 1528

Page 1529

Page 1530

Page 1531

Page 1532

Page 1533
Fuse: Testing and Inspection
Check Fuses
A blade type fuse test taps provided to allow checking the fuse itself without removing if from the
fuse box. The fuse is good if the test lamp lights up when one lead is connected to the test taps
(one at a time) and the other lead is grounded. (Turn the ignition switch so that the fuse circuit
becomes operative)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1538
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information >
Specifications > Relay Box (Passenger Compartment)
Relay Box: Specifications Relay Box (Passenger Compartment)
Components

Specifications > Relay Box (Passenger Compartment) > Page 1555
Relay Box: Specifications Relay Box (Engine Compartment)
Components

Relay Box: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Relay Box: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Relay Box: Electrical Diagrams
Relay Box (Engine Compartment)
Components

Relay Box (Passenger Compartment)
Components

Diagrams > Page 1579
Relay Box: Application and ID








Relay Box: Description and Operation
Description
The ICM (Integrated circuit module) relay (A) is united with many kinds of relays and installed side
of the in-panel module.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Relay Box (Engine Compartment)
Relay Box: Testing and Inspection Relay Box (Engine Compartment)
Inspection
Fuse
Relay
correct?
and Inspection > Relay Box (Engine Compartment) > Page 1590
Relay Box: Testing and Inspection Relay Box (Passenger Compartment)
Inspection
Fuse
Relay
correct?
Relay Box: Testing and Inspection ICM (Integrated Circuit Module) Relay Box
Inspection
Front Blower
2. There should be no continuity between the No.1 in the ICM-A and No.10 terminals in the ICM-B
terminals when power is disconnected.
Rear Blower
2. There should be no continuity between the No.4 in the ICM-A and No.12 in the ICM-B terminals
when power is disconnected.
Seat Heater Relays
ICM-B.
disconnected.
Key Interlock
ICM-B.
disconnected.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Relay Box (Engine Compartment)
Relay Box: Service and Repair Relay Box (Engine Compartment)
Components

and Repair > Relay Box (Engine Compartment) > Page 1595
Repair Procedures
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the FAM cover of engine room. 3.
Remove the FAM connectors (2EA) (A) and battery terminal nut (1EA) (B).
4. Remove FAM mounting bolts (3EA) (A) and remove the FAM (B) from splash shield (C).
5. Disconnect the connector from splash shield. 6. Installation is the reverse of removal.
Relay Box: Service and Repair Relay Box (Passenger Compartment)
Components

Repair Procedures
Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Remove the crash pad lower panel (A). .
3. Disconnect the receiver antenna cable and connectors (5EA). Remove IPM mounting nuts (3EA)
and IPM (A).
4. Installation is the reverse of removal procedures.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component
Information > Service and Repair > TPMS Sensors
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Service and Repair TPMS Sensors
Once the low pressure tire is reinflated to the recommended pressure and installed on the vehicle,
the TPMS malfunction and the low tire pressure indicators will extinguish within a few minutes. If
the indicators are not extinguished after a few minutes, please visit an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component
Information > Service and Repair > TPMS Sensors > Page 1604
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Service and Repair TPMS Reset After Tire Rotation or Flat Repair
General Conditions To Learn New Sensors
Typical time at driving continuously over 12.4 mph(20 kph) to learn a new sensor is up to 20
minutes.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair
Lift And Support Points
WARNING:
When heavy rear components such as suspension, fuel tank, spare tire, tailgate and trunk lid are to
be removed, place additional weight in the luggage area before hoisting. When substantial weight
is removed from the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity may change and can cause the
vehicle to tip forward on the hoist.
NOTE:
- Since each tire/wheel assembly weights approximately 30lbs (14kg), placing the front wheels in
the luggage area can assist with the weight distribution.
- Use the same support points to support the vehicle on safety stands.
1. Place the lift blocks under the support points as shown in the illustration. 2. Raise the hoist a few
inches (centimeters) and rock the vehicle to be sure it is firmly supported. 3. Raise the hoist to full
height to inspect the lift points for secure support.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure
Module > Component Information > Locations
Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1613
Description
Receiver
1. Mode
(2) Normal State
2. Overview
1. Overview
the key is on.
2. Operating mode
Operation
Replacement
NOTE:

CAUTION:
thresholds set.
[Receiver]
STACK:
Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation
Description
Receiver
1. Mode
(2) Normal State
2. Overview
1. Overview
Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1620
the key is on.
2. Operating mode
Operation
Replacement
NOTE:

CAUTION:
thresholds set.
[Receiver]

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - Wheel Sensor Service
Precautions
Precautions
Number: 08-SS-005
Date: JULY, 2008
Model: ALL

SENSOR SERVICE
DESCRIPTION:
as shown.
CAUTION:
Precautions > Page 1629
1. Removal:
2. Installation:
= 3.0 lb. ft. (4 Nm, 0.4 Kg. m)
Precautions > Page 1630
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1631
Description
1. Mode

(2) Sleep mode
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
rear right).
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1634
Removal
Tire Removal
CAUTION: -

Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1635
STACK:
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator >
Component Information > Service and Repair > TPMS Sensors
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Service and Repair TPMS Sensors
Once the low pressure tire is reinflated to the recommended pressure and installed on the vehicle,
the TPMS malfunction and the low tire pressure indicators will extinguish within a few minutes. If
the indicators are not extinguished after a few minutes, please visit an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator >
Component Information > Service and Repair > TPMS Sensors > Page 1641
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Service and Repair TPMS Reset After Tire Rotation or Flat Repair
General Conditions To Learn New Sensors
Typical time at driving continuously over 12.4 mph(20 kph) to learn a new sensor is up to 20
minutes.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module >
Description
Receiver
1. Mode
(2) Normal State
2. Overview
1. Overview
the key is on.
2. Operating mode
Operation
Replacement
NOTE:

CAUTION:
thresholds set.
[Receiver]
STACK:
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver
/ Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation
Description
Receiver
1. Mode
(2) Normal State
2. Overview
1. Overview
/ Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1652
the key is on.
2. Operating mode
Operation
Replacement
NOTE:

CAUTION:
thresholds set.
[Receiver]

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - Wheel Sensor Service Precautions
Precautions
Number: 08-SS-005
Date: JULY, 2008

Model: ALL

SENSOR SERVICE
DESCRIPTION:
as shown.
CAUTION:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - Wheel Sensor Service Precautions > Page
1660
1. Removal:
2. Installation:
= 3.0 lb. ft. (4 Nm, 0.4 Kg. m)
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - Wheel Sensor Service Precautions > Page
1661
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1662
Description
1. Mode

(2) Sleep mode
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
rear right).
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1665
Removal
Tire Removal
CAUTION: -

Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1666
ERROR: undefined
STACK:
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Tire Rotation
Tires: Testing and Inspection Tire Rotation
Tire Rotation
Rotate the tires in the pattern illustrated.
Checking For Pull And Wander
If the steering pulls to one side, rotate the tires according to the following wheel rotation procedure.
1. Rotate the front right and front left tires, and perform a road test in order to confirm vehicle
stability.
2. If the steering pulls to the opposite side, rotate the front and rear tires, and perform a road test
again.
3. If the steering continues to pull to one side, rotate the front right and left tires again, and perform
a road test.
4. If the steering continues to pull to the opposite side, replace the front wheels with new ones.
> Tire Rotation > Page 1671
> Tire Rotation > Page 1672
Tires: Testing and Inspection Tire Wear
Tire Wear
1. Measure the tread depth of the tires.
Tread depth [limit]: 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
2. If the remaining tread(A) depth is less than the limit, replace the tire.
NOTE: When the tread depth of the tires is less than 1.6 mm (0.063 in), the wear indicators(B) will
appear.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Wheels - Aluminum Wheel Cleaning And Maintenance
Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Aluminum Wheel Cleaning And Maintenance
Group: BODY
Number: 09-BD-003
Date: JANUARY, 2009
Model: ALL MODELS
Subject: ALUMINUM WHEEL CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE
DESCRIPTION:
This TSB describes how to clean and maintain the aluminum wheels on Hyundai vehicles. The
following information on wheel care may be given to customers as needed. Hyundai has found that
some vehicles equipped with wheels that have been coated with a vapor chrome finish have
exhibited surface damage from the use of harsh chemicals and improper cleaning procedures.
Though these wheels have the appearance of chrome plating, they have a painted surface similar
to the exterior of the vehicle, therefore, the same care should be used when cleaning and
maintaining.
RECOMMENDED CLEANING PROCEDURE:
1. Wash wheels when they are cool, in a shaded area away from direct sunlight.
2. Wash wheels with a neutral detergent or an alkaline wash soap (car soap) using a soft cleaning
sponge.
3. Rinse the soap off the wheel with water spray, then dry wheels using a 100% cotton terry cloth
towel, chamois or a synthetic fabric designed for automotive detailing.
TO AVOID WHEEL DAMAGE, DO NOT USE THE FOLLOWING:
1. Abrasive soaps, cleaners, household detergents and wheel/tire dressings.
2. Abrasive polishes, chrome polishes, chemicals and acid-based cleaners.
3. Abrasive cleaning brushes and steel wool.
4. Some automatic car washes may also cause damage to the vapor chrome finish.
5. Car wash chemical strength cleaners along, with brush agitation could damage the finish.
NOTE: Wheels that are found to be damaged by incorrect cleaning may be considered to have
been damaged by abuse and will not be covered by the vehicle's warranty.
APPLICABLE VEHICLES:
MODELS: All vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 1677
Wheels: Testing and Inspection
Wheel Runout
1. Jack up the vehicle and support it with jack stands. 2. Measure the wheel runout with a dial
indicator as illustrated. 3. Replace the wheel if the wheel runout exceeds the limit.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information >
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
AXLE NUT
Wheel Nut.............................................................................................................................................
....................90-110 N.m (9-11 kgf.m 65.1-79.5 lb.ft)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Specifications
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Wheel Nut Tightening
1. Tightening torque.
Tightening torque : 90 - 110 N.m (9 - 11 kgf.m, 65.1 - 79.5 lb-ft)
CAUTION: When using an impact gun, final tightening torque should be checked using a torque
wrench.
2. Tightening order.
Check the torque again after tightening the wheel nuts diagonally.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair
Wheel Nut Tightening
1. Tightening torque.
Tightening torque : 90 - 110N.m (9 - 11kgf.m, 65.1 - 79.5lb-ft)
CAUTION: When using an impact gun, final tightening torque should be checked using a torque
wrench.
2. Tightening order.
Check the torque again after tightening the wheel nuts diagonally.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair
Towing Information: Service and Repair
Towing
If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service. Never tow vehicle with just a
rope or chain. It is very dangerous.
Emergency Towing
There are three popular methods of towing a vehicle :
- The operator loads the vehicle on the back of truck. This is best way of transporting the vehicle.
- The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and lift them off the
ground. The other two wheels remain on the ground.
- The tow truck uses metal cables with hooks on the ends. These hooks go around parts of the
frame or suspension, and the cables lift that end of the vehicle off the ground. The vehicle's
suspension and body can be seriously damaged if this method of towing is attempted.
If the vehicle cannot be transported by flat-bed, if should be towed with the front wheels off the
ground. If due to damage, the vehicle must be toward with the front wheels on the ground, do the
following : Manual Transmission
- Release the parking brake.
- Shift the transmission to neutral
Automatic Transmission
- Release the parking brake.
- Start the engine.
- Shift to [D] position, then [N] position.
- Turn off the engine.
CAUTION: -
Improper towing preparation will damage the transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly. If
you cannot shift the transmission or start the engine(automatic transmission), your vehicle must be
transported on a flatbed.
- It is the best to tow vehicle no farther than 19miles (30km), and keep the speed below 30mph
(50km/h).
- Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not
designed to support the vehicle's weight.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair
Lift And Support Points
WARNING:
When heavy rear components such as suspension, fuel tank, spare tire, tailgate and trunk lid are to
be removed, place additional weight in the luggage area before hoisting. When substantial weight
is removed from the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity may change and can cause the
vehicle to tip forward on the hoist.
NOTE:
- Since each tire/wheel assembly weights approximately 30lbs (14kg), placing the front wheels in
the luggage area can assist with the weight distribution.
- Use the same support points to support the vehicle on safety stands.
1. Place the lift blocks under the support points as shown in the illustration. 2. Raise the hoist a few
inches (centimeters) and rock the vehicle to be sure it is firmly supported. 3. Raise the hoist to full
height to inspect the lift points for secure support.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - CVVT Oil Control Valve Inspection
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - CVVT Oil Control Valve
Inspection
Group ENGINE
Number 09-EM-002
Date MAY, 2009
Model MULTIPLE MODELS (SEE BELOW)
Subject CVVT OIL CONTROL VALVE INSPECTION
DESCRIPTION:
When diagnosing the Continuously Variable Valve Timing (CVVT) system for rough idling, poor
acceleration, camshaft timing misalignment-related trouble codes, misfire related trouble codes,
and/or other related symptoms, it may be required to inspect the Oil Control Valve (OCV) for proper
operation. Follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin to inspect the OCV. If the OCV operates
normally, then carry out other necessary repairs. Do not replace the OCV if normal operation is
confirmed.
^ Model: Hyundai vehicles equipped with CVVT systems
RELEVANT DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC)

Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - CVVT Oil Control Valve Inspection >
Page 1699
INSPECTION FLOW DIAGRAM
OCV COIL RESISTANCE SPECIFICATION
OCV INSPECTION PROCEDURE:

Page 1700
1. Measure the resistance between the OCV Power and Signal terminals.
2. Check if the OCV operates normally by providing 12V power as shown in the picture above.
IMPORTANT:
Careful attention is necessary to avoid a short circuit when providing the OCV with 12V power.
Spacing between the OCV power and signal terminals is very narrow. Use suitable connections to
prevent shorting of the test power supply.
3. When 12V power is provided to the OCV, the OCV must move forward as shown in the picture
shown above.
A: Maximum retarded valve timing condition (12V not provided)
B: Maximum advanced valve timing condition (12V provided)
NOTE:
Reverse the connection polarity if the movement is opposite.

Page 1701
4. If the OCV does not move forward, examine if a foreign object like an aluminum chip (C) is
jammed inside the OCV.
^ Blow out the foreign object using compressed air, reinstall the OCV and then verify that the fault
is corrected.
^ If there is no damage to the OCV, then do not replace the OCV.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
Normal warranty applies, if applicable.

Timing Actuator > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Specifications Engine Control System
Specification
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System > Page 1704
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Specifications Fuel System - Specifications
Specification
Actuators CVVT Oil Control Valve (OCV)
- Specification
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1705
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations
Component Location
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1708
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Exploded Views
Components
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Electrical Diagrams
Circuit Diagram
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > CVVT Oil Control Valve (OCV)
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation CVVT Oil Control Valve (OCV)
Description
The Continuously Variable Valve Timing (CVVT) system controls the amount of valve overlap by
varying the amount of oil flow into an assembly mounted on each intake camshaft through PCM
control of an oil control valve. This system uses two oil control valves, one on each bank. An Oil
Temperature Sensor (OTS) is used to allow PCM monitoring of engine oil temperature. As oil is
directed into the chambers of the CVVT assembly, the cam phase is changed to suit various
performance and emissions requirements.
1. When camshaft rotates engine rotation-wise: Intake-Advance / Exhaust-Retard 2. When

camshaft rotates counter engine rotation-wise: Intake- Retard / Exhaust- Advance
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > CVVT Oil Control Valve (OCV) > Page 1725
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation CVVT (Continuously Variable Valve
Timing) System
Description
The CVVT (Continuously Variable Valve Timing) which is installed on the exhaust camshaft
controls intake valve open and close timing in order to improve engine performance. The intake
valve timing is optimized by CVVT system depending on engine rpm. This CVVT system improves
fuel efficiency and reduces NOx emissions at all levels of engine speed, vehicle speed, and engine
load by EGR effect because of valve over-lap optimization. The CVVT changes the phase of the
intake camshaft via oil pressure. It changes the intake valve timing continuously.
Operation
The CVVT system makes continuous intake valve timing changes based on operating conditions.
Intake valve timing is optimized to allow the engine to produce maximum power. Cam angle is
advanced to obtain the EGR effect and reduce pumping loss. The intake valve is closed quickly to
reduce the entry of the air/fuel mixture into the intake port and improve the changing effect.
Reduces the cam advance at idle, stabilizes combustion, and reduces engine speed. If a
malfunction occurs, the CVVT system control is disabled and the valve timing is fixed at the fully
retarded position.
1. The above figure shows the relative operation structures of the housing vane to the rotor vane.
2. If the CVVT is held a certain control angle, to hold this state, oil is replenished as much as oil
leaks from the oil pump.
The OCV (Oil-flow Control Valve) spool location at this time is as follows.
Oil pump -> Advance oil chamber (Little by little open the inflow side to the advance oil chamber) ->
Almost close the drain side
Be sure there might be a difference in the position according to the engine running state (rpm, oil
temperature, and oil pressure).
Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations
Component Location
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information >
Specifications
Compression Check
Compression
pressure...............................................................................................................................1,225 kPa
(12.5 kgf/cm2, 177 psi) - 200 - 250 rpm
..............................1,078 kPa (11.0 kgf/cm2, 156 psi)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information >
NOTE:
pressure.

1,078kPa (11.0kgf/cm2, 156psi)
the gasket.
surge tank.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft
Bearing > Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Bearing: Specifications
camshaft bearing cap
Install camshaft bearing caps. Assemble camshaft bearing caps as the order below.
Tightening torque
5.9 Nm (0.6 kgf.m, 4.3 lb-ft) - 1st step 9.80 - 11.76 Nm (1.0 - 1.2 kgf.m, 7.23 - 8.68 lb-ft) - 2nd step
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft
Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Install the CVVT and camshaft sprocket
Tightening
torque..................................................................................................................................64.68 -
76.44 Nm (6.6 - 7.8 kgf.m, 47.74 - 56.4 lb-ft)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft,
Engine > Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft: Specifications
Camshaft
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - CVVT Oil Control Valve Inspection
Inspection
Group ENGINE
Number 09-EM-002
Date MAY, 2009
DESCRIPTION:
confirmed.

Page 1748

Page 1749
IMPORTANT:
shown above.
NOTE:

Page 1750
is corrected.

Timing Actuator > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System
Specification
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System > Page 1753
Specification
- Specification
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1754
Component Location
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Components
Circuit Diagram
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > CVVT Oil Control Valve (OCV)
Description

Timing) System
Description
Operation
retarded position.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod
Bearing > Component Information > Specifications
Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications
Connecting Rod Bearing Cap
Reinstall the bearing half and cap, and torque the bolts.
Tightening torque..................................................................................................................................
....................19.6 Nm (2.0 kgf.m, 14.46 lb-ft) + 90°
Reinstall the bearings and caps, then torque the bolts.
Tightening torque
49.00 Nm (5.0 kgf.m, 36.16 lb-ft) + 90°
19.60 Nm (2.0 kgf.m, 14.46 lb-ft) + 120°
29.40 - 31.36 Nm (3.0 - 3.2 kgf.m, 21.70 - 23.14 lb-ft)
Connecting Rod Bearing Oil Clearance
Standard oil clearance..........................................................................................................................

.......................0.038 - 0.056 mm (0.0015 - 0.0022 in.)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod,
Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Torque To Yield Bolt Torque Specifications
Connecting Rod: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Torque To Yield Bolt Torque Specifications
Group ENGINE MECHANICAL
Number 09-EM-006
Date AUGUST, 2009
Subject GUIDELINES AND TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS OF ENGINE FASTENERS USING THE

TORQUE-ANGLE METHOD
This bulletin is an extension of TSB 02-20-002 to include latest models and guidelines.
DESCRIPTION:
The information outlined in this bulletin provides reuse guidelines and torque specifications for the
cylinder head, connecting rod, and main bearing bolts that must be fastened using the torque-angle
method.
VEHICLES AFFECTED
REQUIRED TOOLS: ^ Torque Wrench (1/4" for small torque and 3/8" for medium torque values)
^ (OPTIONAL) Torque Angle Gauge
NOTE:
Commercially available torque angle gauges such as the Snap-On (P/N TA360) can be used as an
aid to determine the angular values.
SERVICE INFORMATION:
^ Always use fresh engine oil to coat the bolt threads and both sides of the washer of a
torque-angle fastener.
^ Follow the loosening and tightening sequence specified in the applicable Shop Manual for the
cylinder head bolts and the main bearing cap bolts.
Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Torque To Yield Bolt Torque Specifications >
Page 1784
CYLINDER HEAD BOLTS

Page 1785
MAIN BEARING CAP BOLTS
Page 1786
CONNECTING ROD CAP BOLTS

Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Connecting Rod
Connecting Rod: Specifications Connecting Rod
Connecting Rod
Standard end play................................................................................................................................

..................................0.1 - 0.25 mm (0.004 - 0.010 in.)
Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Connecting Rod > Page 1789
Connecting Rod: Specifications Piston Pin
Piston Pin
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main
Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Torque To Yield Bolt Torque Specifications
Crankshaft Main Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Torque To Yield Bolt Torque
Specifications
Number 09-EM-006
Date AUGUST, 2009

TORQUE-ANGLE METHOD
DESCRIPTION:
method.
VEHICLES AFFECTED
NOTE:
Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Torque To Yield Bolt Torque Specifications >
Page 1794
CYLINDER HEAD BOLTS

Page 1795
Page 1796

Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Crankshaft Bearing Oil Clearance
Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Crankshaft Bearing Oil Clearance
Crankshaft Bearing Oil Clearance

Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Crankshaft Bearing Oil Clearance > Page 1799
Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Main Bearing
Main Bearing Cap
Install main bearing cap bolts.

(1) Install and uniformly tighten the bearing cap bolts, in several passes, in the sequence shown.
Tightening torque Main bearing cap bolt 49.00 Nm (5.0 kgf.m, 36.16 lb-ft) + 90° (1 - 8) 19.60 Nm
(2.0 kgf.m, 14.46 lb-ft) + 120° (9 - 16) 29.40 - 31.36 Nm (3.0 - 3.2 kgf.m, 21.70 - 23.14 lb-ft) (17 -
22)
NOTE: -
Always use new main bearing cap bolt.
- If any of the bearing cap bolts in broken or deformed, replace it.
Use SST( 09221-4A000 ), install main bearing cap bolts.
Main Bearing Size Codes
Place Of Identification Mark (Connecting Rod Bearing)
Discrimination Of Connecting Rod Bearing

Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Crankshaft Bearing Oil Clearance > Page 1800
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Crankshaft: Specifications
Crankshaft Journal Diameter & Limits
Crankshaft Specifications
Reinstall the bearings and caps, then torque the bolts.
Tightening torque
49.00 Nm (5.0 kgf.m, 36.16 lb-ft) + 90°
19.60 Nm (2.0 kgf.m, 14.46 lb-ft) + 120°
29.40 - 31.36 Nm (3.0 - 3.2 kgf.m, 21.70 - 23.14 lb-ft)
Check crankshaft end play
Standard end play................................................................................................................................

............................0.10 - 0.28 mm (0.0039 - 0.0110 in.)
Main journal diameter...........................................................................................................................

..................68.942 - 68.960 mm (2.7142 - 2.7149 in.) Crank pin diameter...........................................
.......................................................................................................54.954 - 54.972 mm (2.1635 -
2.1642 in.)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer -
Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications
Crankshaft Pulley
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine >
Piston: Specifications
Piston
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine >
Piston Ring: Specifications
Piston ring
Piston ring side clearance
Standard No.1......................................................................................................................................
..........................................0.03 - 0.07 mm (0.0012 - 0.0027 in.) No.2.................................................
...............................................................................................................................0.03 - 0.07 mm
(0.0012 - 0.0027 in.) Oil ring.................................................................................................................
...........................................................0.06 - 0.15 mm (0.0024 - 0.0059 in.)
Limit No.1.............................................................................................................................................
................................................................0.1 mm (0.004 in.) No.2........................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................0.1
mm (0.004 in.) Oil ring..........................................................................................................................
..............................................................................0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
Piston ring end gap
Standard No.1......................................................................................................................................
..........................................0.17 - 0.32 mm (0.0067 - 0.0126 in.) No.2.................................................
...............................................................................................................................0.32 - 0.47 mm
(0.0126 - 0.0185 in.) Oil ring.................................................................................................................
...........................................................0.20 - 0.70 mm (0.0079 - 0.0275 in.)
Limit No.1.............................................................................................................................................
..............................................................0.6 mm (0.0236 in.) No.2........................................................
...................................................................................................................................................0.7
mm (0.0275 in.) Oil ring........................................................................................................................
..............................................................................0.8 mm (0.0315 in.)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance >
System Information > Specifications
Valve Clearance
Valve Clearance

.......................................................................................20°C [68°F] Limit Intake................................
..............................................................................................................................................0.10 -
0.30 mm (0.0039 - 0.0118 in.) Exhaust................................................................................................
...........................................................................0.20 - 0.40 mm (0.0079 - 0.0157 in.)

.......................................................................................................................................0.17 - 0.23
mm (0.0067 - 0.0090 in.) Exhaust........................................................................................................
...................................................................0.27 - 0.33 mm (0.0106 - 0.0129 in.)
System Information > Specifications > Page 1817
NOTE:
cover.

valve clearance.
clearance. )

value.

Exhaust : N = T + [A - 0.30mm (0.0118in.)]
3.600mm (0.1417in.)
(0.0067 - 0.0090in.) Exhaust : 0.27 - 0.33mm (0.0106 - 0.0129in.)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Test

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Cylinder Head Bolts >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Torque To Yield Bolt Torque Specifications
Cylinder Head Bolts: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Torque To Yield Bolt Torque
Specifications
Number 09-EM-006
Date AUGUST, 2009

TORQUE-ANGLE METHOD
DESCRIPTION:
method.
VEHICLES AFFECTED
NOTE:
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Torque To Yield Bolt Torque Specifications > Page 1828
CYLINDER HEAD BOLTS



Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure >
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications
Oil Pressure.....................................................................................................................130 KPa

(1.32 kgf/cm2, 18.77 psi) [at 1000 rpm, 110 °C (230 °F)]
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil Capacity
Total .....................................................................................................................................................
............................ 6.0L (6.34 US Qts, 5.28 Imp Qts )
Oil Pan .................................................................................................................................................

............................. 5.5L (5.81 US Qts, 4.84 Imp Qts)
Drain and Refill (with filter)

............................................................................................................................................ 5.2L (5.49
US Qts, 4.58 Imp Qts)
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1839
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Oil
API Classification .................................................................................................................................

.................................................................... SJ or SL
ILSAC Classification ............................................................................................................................

.......................................................... GF-3 or above
Viscosity:
Above -7°C (19.4°F) ............................................................................................................................

..................................................................... 20W-50
Above -13°C (8.6°F) ............................................................................................................................

..................................................................... 15W-40
Above -18°C (-0.4°F) ...........................................................................................................................

.................................................................... 10W-30
Below -18°C (-0.4°F)

.......................................................................................................................................................
5W-20 (recommended) or 5W-30
Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection
Engine Oil
1. Check engine oil quality.
Check the oil for deterioration, entry of water, discoloring or thinning. If the quality is visibly poor,
replace the oil.
2. Check engine oil level.
After warming up the engine and then 5 minutes after the engine stop, oil level should be between
the "L" and "F" marks on the dipstick. If low, check for leakage and add oil up to the "F" mark.
NOTE: Do not fill with engine oil above the "F" mark.
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Engine Oil: Procedures
Selection Of Engine Oil
Recommended API classification : Above SJ or SL Recommended SAE viscosity grades : 5W-20 If

5W-20 engine oil is not available, 5W-30 or secondary recommanded engine oil for corresponding
temperature range can be used.
NOTE:
For best performance and maximum protection of all types of operation, select only those
lubricants which :
- Satisfy the requirement of the API classification.
- Have proper SAE grade number for expected ambient temperature range.
Lubricants that do not have both an SAE grade number and API service classification on the
container should not be used.
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1843
Engine Oil: Removal and Replacement
Components
CAUTION:
container.
Capacity Total : 6.0L(6.34U.S.qts,5.27lmp.qts) Oil pan : 5.5L(5.81U.S.qts,4.83lmp.qts) Drain and

refill including oil filter : 5.2L(5.49U.S.qts,4.57lmp.qts) Oil quality : Above API SJ/SL or SAE 5W-20
engine oil level.
Engine Oil: Overhaul
Removal
Oil Pump
1. Drain engine oil. 2. Using SST(09215-3C000) remove lower oil pan(A).
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the contact surfaces of upper oil pan and lower oil pan.
3. Remove oil pump chain cover(A).
4. Remove oil pump chain sprocket(A).
5. Remove oil pump(A).
Installation
Oil Pump
1. Install oil pump(A).
NOTE:
Always use a new O-ring(B).
2. Install oil pump sprocket(A)and oil pump chain on the oil pump.
3. Install oil pump chain cover(A).
4. Install lower oil pan.
A. Using a gasket scraper, remove all the old packing material from the gasket surfaces. B. Before
assembling the oil pan, the liquid sealant TB1217H should be applied on upper oil pan.
The part must be assembled within 5 minutes after the sealant was applied.
Bead width :2.5mm(0.1in.) But marked area(* ) to be 5.0mm(0.2in.)
CAUTION: -
Ensure the sealing face is clean before assembling two parts.
- Remove harmful foreign matters on the sealing face before applying sealant
- When applying sealant gasket, sealant must not be protruded into the inside of oil pan.
- To prevent leakage of oil, apply sealant gasket ot the inner threads of the bolt holes.
C. Install lower oil pan.

D. After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine >
Oil Filter: Service and Repair Components and Components Location
Components
Oil Filter: Service and Repair Engine Oil and Filter Replacement
CAUTION:
container.
Capacity Total : 6.0L(6.34U.S.qts,5.27lmp.qts)

Oil pan : 5.5L(5.81U.S.qts,4.83lmp.qts) Drain and refill including oil filter :
5.2L(5.49U.S.qts,4.57lmp.qts) Oil quality : Above API SJ/SL or SAE 5W-20
engine oil level.
Oil Filter: Service and Repair Oil Filter Assembly
Removal
Oil Filter Assembly
1. Loosen the oil filter cap by turning it counter clockwise with SST (09263-3C100). Allow 5 minutes
for the oil in the filter assembly to drain. 2. Remove surge tank and intake manifold. 3. Disconnect
oil pressure switch connector. 4. Drain the engine coolant. 5. Disconnect water hoses from ETC. 6.
Remove water temperature control assembly. 7. Disconnect water vent hose(A). 8. Remove oil
filter body cover(B).
9. Remove oil filter body.
NOTE: Be careful of the knock sensor connector.
Installation
Oil Filter Assembly
1. Install oil filter body and new O-rings.
NOTE: -
All rubber gasket must be no damaged by assembling parts.
- Be careful of the knock sensor connector.
- Always use a new O-ring
2. Install oil filter body cover(B) and new gasket on the oil filter body.
3. Connect water vent hose(A)
4. Install water temperature control assembly. 5. Connect water hoses on the ETC.
6. Connect oil pressure switch connector. 7. Install intake manifold and surge tank. 8. Fill with
engine coolant. 9. Start engine and check for leaks.
10. Recheck engine coolant level.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Oil Pan: Specifications
Oil Pan
Tightening
torque......................................................................................................................................9.80 -
11.76 Nm (1.0 - 1.2 kgf.m, 7.23 - 8.68 lb-ft)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Engine Mechanical System
Inspection
Oil Pressure Switch
replace the switch.
operaing properly.
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Engine Mechanical System > Page 1864
Inspection
Oil Pressure Switch
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil
Pressure > Component Information > Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications
Oil Pressure.....................................................................................................................130 KPa

(1.32 kgf/cm2, 18.77 psi) [at 1000 rpm, 110 °C (230 °F)]
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Temperature
Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Intake and Exhaust System
Intake Manifold: Specifications Intake and Exhaust System
Components
Specifications > Intake and Exhaust System > Page 1876
Intake Manifold: Specifications Intake Manifold
Intake Manifold
Install intake manifold and new gasket on the cylinder head.
Tightening torque
1st.........................................................................................................................................................
..............3.9 - 5.9 Nm (0.4 - 0.6 kgf.m, 2.9 - 4.3 lb-ft) 2st.....................................................................
..................................................................................18.62 - 23.52 Nm (1.9 - 2.4 kgf.m, 13.74 -
17.36 lb-ft) 3st.......................................................................................................................................
.....................................................Repeat 2nd step twice or move.
NOTE: Be careful of the installation direction.
a - h......................................................................................................................................................
................................................................1st step order 1 - 8...............................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................2nd
step order
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Components and Components Location
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Components and Components Location
Components
and Repair > Components and Components Location > Page 1881
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Repair Procedures
Removal
Intake Manifold
CAUTION:
- Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted surfaces.
- To avoid damage, unplug the wiring connectors carefully while holding the connector portion.
NOTE:
- Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection.
1. Remove the engine cover. 2. Remove the intake air hose and air cleaner assembly.
(1) Disconnect the MAF connector(A). (2) Disconnect the breather hose(B) from air cleaner hose.
(3) Remove the intake air hose and air cleaner assembly(C).
3. Disconnect RH oxygen sensor connector(A).
4. Disconnect RH injector connector(A) and ignition coil connector(B).
5. Disconnect PCSV connector(A), MAP sensor connector(B) and PCSV hose.

6. Disconnect ETC connector(A) and knock sensor connector(B).
7. Remove ETC bracket(A). 8. Disconnect water hoses(B) from ETC. 9. Disconnect PCV(C) hose.
10. Disconnect brake vacuum hose. 11. Remove surge tank stay. 12. Remove connector
bracket(A) from surge tank.
13. Remove surge tank(A).
14. Disconnect breather Pipe assembly(A).
15. Disconnect LH injector connector. 16. Remove the delivery pipe and intake manifold together.
Installation
Intake Manifold
1. Install intake manifold and new gasket on the cylinder head.
Tightening torque 1st : 3.9 - 5.9Nm (0.4 - 0.6kgf.m, 2.9 - 4.3lb-ft) 2st : 18.62 - 23.52Nm (1.9 -
2.4kgf.m, 13.74 - 17.36lb-ft) 3st : Repeat 2nd step twice or move.
NOTE: Be careful of the installation direction. a - h : 1st step order 1 - 8 : 2nd step order
2. Install delivery pipe. 3. Connect LH injector connector. 4. Connect breather Pipe assembly.
5. Install surge tank.
6. Install connector bracket on the surge tank.
7. Install surge tank stay.
8. Connect brake vacuum hose. 9. Connect PCV hose.
10. Connect water hoses to ETC. 11. Install ETC bracket.
12. Connect ETC connector and knock sensor connector. 13. Connect PCSV connector, MAP
sensor connector and PCSV hoe. 14. Connect RH injector connector and ignition coil connector.
15. Connect RH oxygen sensor connector. 16. Install air cleaner upper cover and in take hose. 17.
Connect MAF(A) and breather hose.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure
Sender > Component Information > Locations
Sender > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Engine Mechanical System
Inspection
Oil Pressure Switch
replace the switch.
operaing properly.
Sender > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Engine Mechanical System > Page 1892
Inspection
Oil Pressure Switch
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature
Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket >
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Install the CVVT and camshaft sprocket
Tightening
torque..................................................................................................................................64.68 -
76.44 Nm (6.6 - 7.8 kgf.m, 47.74 - 56.4 lb-ft)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component
Timing Chain: Specifications
Components
Timing Chain: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
Sprockets, Chain Tensioner, Chain Guide, Chain Tensioner Arm
1. Check the camshaft sprocket and crankshaft sprocket for abnormal wear, cracks, or damage.
Replace as necessary. 2. Inspect the tensioner arm and chain guide for abnormal wear, cracks, or
damage. Replace as necessary. 3. Check that the tensioner piston moves smoothly when the
ratchet pawl is released with thin rod.
Timing Chain: Service and Repair Components and Components Location
Components
Timing Chain: Service and Repair Repair Procedures
1 of 2
Removal
CAUTION:
- Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted surfaces.
- To avoid damage, unplug the wiring connectors carefully while holding the connector portion.
NOTE:
- Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection.
- Turn the crankshaft pulley so that the No.1 piston is at top dead center.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable (A).
2. Remove the engine cover (A).
3. Remove the intake air hose and air cleaner assembly.
(1) Disconnect the MAF sensor connector (A). (2) Disconnect the breather hose (B) from air intake
hose. (3) Remove the intake air hose and air cleaner assembly(C).
4. Remove the RH front wheel. 5. Remove the under cover (A).

6. Remove the side cover. 7. Loosen the drain plug and drain the engine coolant. 8. Drain the
engine oil. 9. Remove the surge tank.
(1) Disconnect the RH oxygen sensor connector (A) and loosen the power steering hose mounting
bolts (B).
(2) Disconnect the RH injector connector (A) and ignition coil connector (B).
(3) Disconnect the PCSV connector (A), MAP sensor connector (B) and PCSV hose.
(4) Disconnect the ETC connector (A) and knock sensor connector (B).
(5) Disconnect the OCV connector (A) and knock sensor connector (B).
(6) Disconnect the LH front oxygen sensor connector (A).
(7) Disconnect the LH ignition coil connector (A), injector connector (B), condenser connector (C)
and ground (D), and remove the wiring
harness protector (E).
(8) Disconnect the LH CMPS (A) and oil pressure switch connector (B).
(9) Remove the ETC bracket (A).
(10) Disconnect the water hoses (B) from ETC. (11) Disconnect the PCV hose (C).
(12) Disconnect the brake vacuum hose. (13) Remove the surge tank stay (A).
(14) Remove the connector bracket (A) from surge tank.
(15) Remove the surge tank (A).
NOTE: Cover the inlet of intake manifold with a clean woven stuff or vinyl cover to prevent foreign
materials from entering.
10. Remove the cylinder head cover.
(1) Remove the connector bracket (A) from LH cylinder head cover.
(2) Disconnect the RH ignition coil connector (A), condenser connector (B) and remove the wiring
bracket (C).
(3) Remove the LH, RH ignition coil. (4) Remove the LH, RH cylinder head cover (A).
11. Using SST (09215-3C000) remove lower oil pan (A).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the contact surfaces of upper oil pan and lower oil pan.
12. Set a jack to the upper oil pan.
13. Remove the coolant reservoir tank. 14. Remove the engine mounting bracket (A).
cover.
NOTE: Do not rotate engine counterclockwise.
(2) Check that the mark (A) of the camshaft timing sprockets are in straight line on the cylinder
head surface as shown in the illustration.
If not, turn the crankshaft one revolution (360°).
NOTE: Do not rotate engine counterclockwise.
16. Remove the drive belt (A).
17. Using SST (09231-3C300) remove the crankshaft damper pulley (A).
18. Lift up the engine assembly to using the jack. 19. Remove the drive belt idler (A).
20. Remove the drive belt auto tensioner (A).

21. Remove the water pump pulley (A).
22. Remove the timing chain cover (A).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the contact surfaces of cylinder block, cylinder head and timing
chain cover. Before removing the timing chain, mark the RH/LH timing chain with an identification
based on the location of the sprocket because the identification mark on the chain for TDC (Top
Dead Center) can be erased.
23. Install a set pin after compressing the timing chain tensioner.
24. Remove the RH cam-to-cam guide (A).
25. Remove the RH timing chain auto tensioner (A) and RH timing chain tensioner arm (B).
26. Remove the RH timing chain. 27. Remove the RH timing chain guide (A).
28. Remove the oil pump chain cover (A).
29. Remove the oil pump chain tensioner assembly (A).
30. Remove the oil pump chain guide (A).
31. Remove the oil pump chain sprocket (A) and oil pump chain (B).
32. Remove the crankshaft sprocket (A) (Oil pump & RH camshaft drive).
33. Install a set pin after compressing the LH timing chain tensioner.
34. Remove the LH cam-to-cam guide (A).
35. Remove the LH timing chain auto tensioner (A) and LH timing chain tensioner arm (B).
36. Remove the LH timing chain. 37. Remove the LH timing chain guide (A).
38. Remove the crankshaft sprocket (A) (LH camshaft drive).
39. Remove the tensioner adapter assembly (A).
Installation
1. Install the jack to the upper oil pan. 2. The key (A) of crankshaft should be aligned with the timing
mark (B) of timing chain cover. As a result of this, the piston of No.1 cylinder is
placed at the top dead center on compression stroke.
3. Install the tensioner adapter assembly (A).
4. Install the crankshaft sprocket (A) (LH camshaft drive).

5. Install the LH timing chain guide (A).
Tightening torque : 19.60 - 24.50N.m(2.0 - 2.5kgf.m, 14.17 - 18.08lb-ft)
6. Install LH timing chain.
To install the timing chain with no slack between each shaft (cam, crank), follow the procedure
below. Crankshaft sprocket -> Timing chain guide -> Exhaust camshaft sprocket(C) -> Intake
camshaft sprocket(D). The timing mark of each sprocket should be matched with timing mark (color
link) of timing chain at installing timing chain.
7. Install the LH timing chain tensioner arm(B).
8. Install the LH chain tensioner (A).

9. Install the LH cam-to-cam guide (A).
10. Install the crankshaft sprocket (A) (Oil pump & RH camshaft drive).
11. Install the oil pump chain (B) and oil pump sprocket (A).
12. Install the RH timing chain guide (A).

13. Install the RH timing chain.
To install the timing chain with no slack between each shaft (cam, crank), follow the procedure
below. Crankshaft sprocket (A) -> Intake camshaft sprocket (B) -> Exhaust camshaft sprocket (C).
The timing mark of each sprocket should be matched with timing mark (color link) of timing chain at
installing timing chain.
14. Install the RH timing chain tensioner arm (B).
15. Install the RH timing chain auto tensioner (A).
16. Install the RH cam-to-cam guide (A).
17. Install the oil pump chain guide (A).

2 of 2
18. Install the oil pump chain tensioner assembly (A).
19. Pull out the pins of hydraulic tensioners (LH & RH).
20. Install the oil pump chain cover (A).
Tightening torque : 9.80 - 11.76Nm(1.0 - 1.2kgf.m, 7.23 - 8.68lb-ft)
21. After rotating crankshaft 2 revolutions in regular direction (clockwise viewed from front), confirm
the timing mark.
NOTE: Always turn the crankshaft clockwise.

22. Install the timing chain cover.
(1) The sealant locations on chain cover and on counter parts (cylinder head, cylinder block, and
lower oil pan) must be free of engine oil and
ETC.
(2) Before assembling the timing chain cover, the liquid sealant TB1217H should be applied on the
gap between cylinder head and cylinder block.
The part must be assembled within 5 minutes after sealant was applied.
Bead width: 2.5mm(0.1in.)
(3) After applying liquid sealant TB1217H on the timing chain cover.
The part must be assembled within 5 minutes after sealant was applied. Sealant should be applied
without discontinuity.
(4) Install the new gasket (A) to the timing chain cover.
NOTE: During timing cover installation, care not to take off applied sealant on the timing cover by
contact with other parts.
(5) The dowel pins on the cylinder block and holes on the timing chain cover should be used as a
reference in order to assemble the timing chain
cover to be in exact position.
Tightening torque : B(17) : 18.62 - 21.56N.m (1.9 - 2.2kgf.m, 13.74 - 15.91lb-ft) C(4) : 9.80 -
11.76N.m (1.0 - 1.2kgf.m, 7.23 - 8.68lb-ft) D(1) : 58.80 - 68.80N.m (6.0 - 7.0kgf.m, 43.40 -
50.63lb-ft) E(1) : 58.80 - 68.80N.m (6.0 - 7.0kgf.m, 43.40 - 50.63lb-ft) F(2) : 24.50 - 26.46N.m (2.5 -
2.7kgf.m, 18.08 - 19.53lb-ft) G(4) : 21.56 - 23.52N.m (2.2 - 2.4kgf.m, 15.91 - 17.36lb-ft)
H(1) : 9.80 - 11.76N.m (1.0 - 1.2kgf.m, 7.23 - 8.68lb-ft) I(1) : 9.80 - 11.76N.m (1.0 - 1.2kgf.m, 7.23 -
8.68lb-ft) J(1) : 9.80 - 11.76N.m (1.0 - 1.2kgf.m, 7.23 - 8.68lb-ft) K(4) : 9.80 - 11.76N.m (1.0 -
1.2kgf.m, 7.23 - 8.68lb-ft) L(1): 21.56 - 26.46N.m (2.2 - 2.7kgf.m, 15.91 - 19.53lb-ft) - New bolt
(6) The firing and/or blow out test should not be performed within 30 minutes after the timing chain
cover was assembled.
23. Install the water pump pulley (A).
24. Install the drive belt auto tensioner (A).
Tightening torque : Bolt(B): 81.39 - 85.32N.m (8.3 - 8.7kgf.m, 60.03 - 62.93lb-ft) Bolt(C): 17.64 -
21.56N.m (1.8 - 2.2kgf.m, 13.02 - 15.91lb-ft)
25. Install the drive belt idler (A).

26. Lower the engine assembly by using the jack. 27. Using SST (09231-3C100), install timing
chain cover oil seal.
28. Using SST (09231-3C300) install the crankshaft damper pulley (A).
Tightening torque : 284.2 - 303.8N.m (29.0 - 31.0kgf.m, 209.76 - 224.22lb-ft)
29. Install the drive belt (A).
Crankshaft pulley -> A/C pulley -> idler pulley -> alternator pulley -> water pump pulley -> P/S
pump pulley-> tensioner pulley. Rotate auto tensioner arm in the counterclockwise moving auto
tensioner pulley bolt with wrench. After putting belt on auto tensioner pulley, release the auto
tensioner pulley slowly.
30. Install the cylinder head cover.
(1) The hardening sealant located on the upper area between timing chain cover and cylinder head
should be removed before assembling cylinder
head cover.
(2) After applying sealant (TB1217H), it should be assembled within 5 minutes.

(3) The firing and/or blow out test should not be performed within 30 minutes after the cylinder
head cover was assembled. (4) Install the cylinder head cover bolts as following method.
CAUTION: Do not reuse cylinder head cover gasket.
(5) Install the ignition coil. (6) Connect the RH ignition coil connector (A), the condenser connector
(B) and install the wiring bracket (C).
(7) Install the connector bracket (A) to the LH cylinder head cover.
31. Install the surge tank and wiring connectors.
(1) Install the surge tank (A).

(2) Install the connector bracket (A) to the surge tank.
(3) Install the surge tank stay.
(4) Connect the brake vacuum hose. (5) Connect the PCV hose (C). (6) Connect the water hoses
(B) to the ETC. (7) Install the ETC bracket (A).
(8) Connect the LH CMPS connector (A) and oil pressure switch connector(B).
(9) Install the wiring harness protector (E) and connect the LH ignition coil connector (A), injector
connector (B), condenser connector (C) and
ground (D).
(10) Connect the LH front oxygen sensor connector (A).
(11) Connect the OCV connector (A) and knock sensor connector (B).
(12) Connect the ETC connector (A) and knock sensor connector (B).
(13) Connect the PCSV connector (A), MAP sensor connector (B) and PCSV hose.
(14) Connect the RH injector connector (A) and ignition coil connector (B).
(15) Connect the RH oxygen sensor connector (A) and tighten the power steering hose mounting
bolts (B).
32. Install the engine mounting bracket (A).
33. Install the coolant reservoir tank. 34. Remove the jack from the upper oil pan. 35. Install lower
oil pan.
(1) Using a gasket scraper, remove all the old packing material from the gasket surfaces. (2)
Before assembling the oil pan, the liquid sealant TB1217H should be applied on oil pan.
Bead width: 2.5mm(0.1in.). But marked area(*) to be 5.0mm(0.2in.)
CAUTION:
1) Make clean the sealing face before assembling two parts. 2) Remove harmful foreign matters on
the sealing face before applying sealant. 3) When applying sealant gasket, sealant must not be
protruded into the inside of oil pan. 4) To prevent leakage of oil, apply sealant gasket to the inner
threads of the bolt holes.
(3) Install the lower oil pan (A).
Tightening torque: 9.80 - 11.76N.m (1.0 - 1.2kgf.m, 7.23 - 8.68lb-ft)

36. Install the side cover.
37. Install the under cover (A).
38. Install the RH front wheel.
39. Install the intake air hose and air cleaner assembly.
(1) Install the intake air hose and air cleaner assembly(C). (2) Connect the breather hose (B) to the
air intake hose. (3) Connect the MAF sensor connector (A).
40. Install the engine cover (A).
41. Connect the battery negative cable (A).

NOTE: -
Refill engine with engine oil.
- Refill radiator and reservoir tank with engine coolant.
- Bleed air from the cooling system.
- Start engine and let it run until it warms up. (until the radiator fan operates 3 or 4 times.)
- Turn Off the engine. Check the level in the radiator, add coolant if needed. This will allow trapped
air to be removed from the cooling system.
- Put radiator cap on tightly, then run the engine again and check for leaks.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications
Timing Chain Tensioner

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Timing Cover: Specifications
Timing Chain Cover

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - CVVT Oil Control Valve
Inspection
Inspection
Group ENGINE
Number 09-EM-002
Date MAY, 2009

DESCRIPTION:
confirmed.

Inspection > Page 1942

IMPORTANT:
shown above.
NOTE:

is corrected.

Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System
Specification
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System > Page 1947
Specification
- Specification
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1948
Component Location
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1951
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Components
Circuit Diagram
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > CVVT Oil Control Valve (OCV)
Description

Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > CVVT Oil Control Valve (OCV) >
Page 1968
Timing) System
Description
Operation
retarded position.
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > CVVT Oil Control Valve (OCV) >
Page 1969
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations
Component Location
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > System Information > Specifications
Fuel Pressure Test
Standard
Value.....................................................................................................................................374 ~
384 kpa (3.82 ~ 3.92 kgf/cm2, 54.3 ~ 55.8 psi)
Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1977



Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle
Speed > System Information > Specifications
Specification
Service Standard
Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Test

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing
Order > Component Information > Specifications
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations
Number One Cylinder

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Spark Plug
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 1998
Specification
Spark Plugs
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1999
Spark Plug
Inspect Spark Plug
Standard :
Unleaded : 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.0394 - 0.0433 in.)

Compression Check > System Information > Specifications
Compression Check
Compression
pressure...............................................................................................................................1,225 kPa
(12.5 kgf/cm2, 177 psi) - 200 - 250 rpm
..............................1,078 kPa (11.0 kgf/cm2, 156 psi)
Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2005
NOTE:
pressure.

1,078kPa (11.0kgf/cm2, 156psi)
the gasket.
surge tank.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve
Clearance > System Information > Specifications
Valve Clearance
Valve Clearance

.......................................................................................20°C [68°F] Limit Intake................................
..............................................................................................................................................0.10 -
0.30 mm (0.0039 - 0.0118 in.) Exhaust................................................................................................
...........................................................................0.20 - 0.40 mm (0.0079 - 0.0157 in.)

.......................................................................................................................................0.17 - 0.23
mm (0.0067 - 0.0090 in.) Exhaust........................................................................................................
...................................................................0.27 - 0.33 mm (0.0106 - 0.0129 in.)
Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2009
NOTE:
cover.

valve clearance.
clearance. )

value.

Exhaust : N = T + [A - 0.30mm (0.0118in.)]
3.600mm (0.1417in.)
(0.0067 - 0.0090in.) Exhaust : 0.27 - 0.33mm (0.0106 - 0.0129in.)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications > Components and Components Location
Water Pump: Specifications Components and Components Location
Components
Specifications > Components and Components Location > Page 2017
Water Pump: Specifications Water Pump
Water Pump
Install the water pump(A) and a new gasket(B) with 12 bolts.
Tightening torque 21.56 - 23.52 Nm (2.2 - 2.4 kgf.m, 15.91 - 17.36 lb-ft) 9.80 - 11.76 Nm (1.0 - 1.2
kgf.m, 7.23 - 8.68 lb-ft)
Water Pump: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
Water Pump
1. Check each part for cracks, damage or wear, and replace the coolant pump assembly if
necessary. 2. Check the bearing for damage, abnormal noise and sluggish rotation, and replace
the coolant pump assembly if necessary. 3. Check for coolant leakage. If coolant leaks from hole,
the seal is malfunctioning. Replace the coolant pump assembly.
NOTE: A small amount of "weeping" from the bleed hole is normal.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Components and Components Location
Water Pump: Service and Repair Components and Components Location
Components
Water Pump: Service and Repair Repair Procedures
Removal
Water Pump
1. Drain the engine coolant.

WARNING: System is under high pressure when the engine is hot. To avoid danger of releasing
scalding engine coolant, remove the cap only when the engine is cool.
2. Remove drive belt(A).
3. Remove the 4 bolts and pump pulley(A).
4. Remove the water pump(A) and gasket.
Installation
Water Pump
1. Install the water pump(A) and a new gasket(B) with 12 bolts.
Tightening torque 21.56 - 23.52Nm (2.2 - 2.4kgf.m, 15.91 - 17.36lb-ft) 9.80 - 11.76Nm (1.0 -
1.2kgf.m, 7.23 - 8.68lb-ft)
NOTE: Make clean the contact face before assembly.
2. Install the 4 bolts and pump pulley(A).
3. Install drive belt(A).
4. Fill with engine coolant. 5. Start engine and check for leaks. 6. Recheck engine coolant level.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Engine Coolant
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
.................................. 7.8L (8.2 US qts, 6.8 Imp Qts)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2030
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Coolant Type
Type .......................................................................................................................................50%
Ethylene glycol base for aluminum, 50% distilled water.
Note: Do not mix different types of coolant.
Do not use additional rust inhibitors or anti rust products; they may not be compatible with the
coolant.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair
Components
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 2034
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling
Fan Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2043
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature
Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Engine
Control System
Specification
Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Engine
Specification

Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page
2065
Component Location
Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2082
Description
drivability.
Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Inspection
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Components and Components Location
Radiator: Service and Repair Components and Components Location
Components
Service and Repair > Components and Components Location > Page 2090
Radiator: Service and Repair Repair Procedures
Removal
Radiator
1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the radiator grille upper cover(A).
3. Remove the radiator support upper member assembly(A) for convenience sake.
NOTE: The bottom side bolt(A) which can be seen after removing the under cover should be
loosened for removal of the radiator support upper member assembly.
4. Disconnect radiator upper and lower hoses(A).
5. Disconnect transaxle oil cooler hoses(A).

6. Disconnect the radiator fan connectors(A).
7. Disconnect the pressure lines(A) from the radiator assembly(B).
8. Separate the condenser(A) from the radiator assembly(B) by removing the bolts(C).
9. Remove the radiator bracket.
10. Remove the radiator assembly. 11. Remove the radiator cooling fan(A).
Installation
Radiator
1. Install the radiator fan(A) to the radiator.
2. Install the radiator assembly to the vehicle. 3. Install the radiator bracket. 4. Fix the condenser
with the radiator assembly.
Tightening torque 4.9 - 7.8Nm (0.5 - 0.8kgf.m, 3.6 - 5.8lb-ft) - D 6.9 - 9.8Nm (0.7 - 1.0kgf.m, 5.1 -
7.2lb-ft) - C
5. Connect the radiator fan connectors(A).

6. Connect the pressure lines(A) to the radiator assembly(B).
7. Connect transaxle oil cooler hoses(A).
8. Connect radiator upper and lower hoses(A).
9. Install the radiator support upper member assembly(A).
10. Install the radiator grille upper cover(A).

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Specification
Specification

Component Location
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Description
drivability.
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Inspection
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component
Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications
Thermostat: Mechanical Specifications
Components
Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 2135
Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 2136
Thermostat: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Thermostat
Valve opening temperature..................................................................................................................

................................................................82°C (177°F)
Full opening temperature......................................................................................................................

...............................................................95°C (205°F)
Valve lift................................................................................................................................................
.........................Min. 10 mm (0.4in.) at 95°C (205°F)
Thermostat: Testing and Inspection
Thermostat
1. Immerse the thermostat in water and gradually heat the water.
2. Check the valve opening temperature.
Valve opening temperature : 82°C (177°F) Full opening temperature : 95°C (205°F) If the valve
opening temperature is not as specified, replace the thermostat.
3. Check the valve lift.
Valve lift : Min. 10mm (0.4in.) at 95°C (205°F) If the valve lift is not as specified, replace the
thermostat.
Thermostat: Service and Repair Components and Components Location
Components
Thermostat: Service and Repair Repair Procedures
Removal
Thermostat
NOTE:
Removal of the thermostat would have an adverse effect, causing a lowering of cooling efficiency.
Do not remove the thermostat, even if the engine tends to overheat.
1. Drain engine coolant so its level is below thermostat. 2. Remove water inlet(A) and
thermostat(B).
Installation
Thermostat
1. Place thermostat in thermostat housing.

(1) Install the thermostat with the jiggle valve upward. (2) Install a new thermostat(B).
2. Install water inlet(A).
3. Fill with engine coolant. 4. Start engine and check for leaks.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications > Components and Components Location
Water Pump: Specifications Components and Components Location
Components
Water Pump: Specifications Water Pump
Water Pump
Install the water pump(A) and a new gasket(B) with 12 bolts.
Tightening torque 21.56 - 23.52 Nm (2.2 - 2.4 kgf.m, 15.91 - 17.36 lb-ft) 9.80 - 11.76 Nm (1.0 - 1.2
kgf.m, 7.23 - 8.68 lb-ft)
Water Pump: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
Water Pump
1. Check each part for cracks, damage or wear, and replace the coolant pump assembly if
necessary. 2. Check the bearing for damage, abnormal noise and sluggish rotation, and replace
the coolant pump assembly if necessary. 3. Check for coolant leakage. If coolant leaks from hole,
the seal is malfunctioning. Replace the coolant pump assembly.
NOTE: A small amount of "weeping" from the bleed hole is normal.

Service and Repair > Components and Components Location
Water Pump: Service and Repair Components and Components Location
Components
Water Pump: Service and Repair Repair Procedures
Removal
Water Pump
1. Drain the engine coolant.

WARNING: System is under high pressure when the engine is hot. To avoid danger of releasing
scalding engine coolant, remove the cap only when the engine is cool.
2. Remove drive belt(A).
3. Remove the 4 bolts and pump pulley(A).
4. Remove the water pump(A) and gasket.
Installation
Water Pump
1. Install the water pump(A) and a new gasket(B) with 12 bolts.
Tightening torque 21.56 - 23.52Nm (2.2 - 2.4kgf.m, 15.91 - 17.36lb-ft) 9.80 - 11.76Nm (1.0 -
1.2kgf.m, 7.23 - 8.68lb-ft)
NOTE: Make clean the contact face before assembly.
2. Install the 4 bolts and pump pulley(A).
3. Install drive belt(A).
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component
Catalytic Converter: Locations
Components Location
Catalytic Converter: Service Precautions
Precautions For Catalytic Converter
CAUTION:
If a large amount of unburned gasoline flows into the converter, it may overheat and create a fire
hazard. To prevent this observe the following precations and explain them to your customer.
1. Use only unleaded gasoline. 2. Do not run the engine while the car is at rest for a long time.
Avoid running the engine at fast idle for more than 10minutes and idle speed for more
than 20 minutes.
3. Do not measure engine compression for an extended time. Engine compression tests must be
made as rapidly as possible. Remove the fuel pump
relay before performing a compression test.
4. Do not dispose of used catalytic converter together with parts contaminated with gasoline or oil.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component
Information > Specifications > Specification
Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Specification
Exhaust Manifold
Install new gasket and exhaust manifold.
Tightening
torque....................................................................................................................................39.2 -
44.1 Nm (4.0 - 4.5 kgf.m, 28.92 - 32.53 lb-ft)
Information > Specifications > Specification > Page 2164
Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Components and Components Location
Components
Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Components and Components Location
Components
Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Repair Procedures
Removal
Exhaust Manifold
1. Remove under cover(A).
2. Disconnect LH,RH rear oxygen sensor connector from bracket. 3. Remove front muffler(A).
4. Remove oil level gauge(A). 5. Disconnect LH front oxygen sensor connector(B) from bracket.
6. Remove LH heat protector(A).
7. Remove LH exhaust manifold. 8. Disconnect RH front oxygen sensor connector from bracket.
9. Remove RH heat protector.
10. Remove RH exhaust manifold.
Exhaust Manifold
1. Install new gasket and exhaust manifold.
Tightening torque 39.2 - 44.1Nm(4.0 - 4.5kgf.m, 28.92 - 32.53lb-ft)
2. Install heat protector.
Tightening torque 3.9 - 5.9Nm(0.4 - 0.6kgf.m, 2.89 - 4.34lb-ft)
3. Install front muffler.
Tightening torque 39.2 - 58.8N.m(4.0 - 6.0kgf.m, 28.92 - 43.37lb-ft)
4. Connect oxygen sensor connector. 5. Install under cover.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Door Control Module












Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Assist Door Module (ADM)
Description
control
Control Function
2. Timer function
Crash Unlock
Auto Door Lock
locked.
"UNLOCK"
Key Reminder
ignored.
Assist Door Module (ADM) > Page 2212
"3Km/h".
1. Memory operation
2. Replay operation

Fail Safe Function
Courtesy Lamp

ON by DDM, ADM.
Rescue Mode
not normal.

Description
lock and unlock.
Control Function
wires.
up/down functions.
door.
3. Timer function
Key Reminder
ignored.
switch operation.

1. Memory operation
2. Replay operation
"3Km/h" or more.
1. Memory operation
2. Replay operation

Fail Safe Function
IMS Switch
under "3Km/h"
Seat Manual Switch

Courtesy Lamp
communication.
ON by DDM,ADM.
Rescue Mode
not normal

Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Assist
Door Module(ADM)
Replacement
Door Module(ADM) > Page 2219
Replacement

Replacement
Replacement

Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Component Location
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2225
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Connector [C01-1]
Connector [C01-2]
Connector [C01-1]
Connector [C01-2]
Circuit Diagram
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2258
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Component Location
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2262
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Component Location
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2267
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Component Location
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2271
Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Specification
Specification

> Page 2283
Component Location
> Page 2284
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Page 2301
Description
Specification

Specification
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page
2307
Component Location
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page
2308
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2325
Description
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications
Specification

Component Location
Component Location

Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
2349
Description
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
2350
Waveform
Specification
Specification

Component Location
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Description
drivability.
Electrical Specifications
Specification

Electrical Specifications > Page 2378
Specification

7.8-11.8 N.m, 5.8-8.7 lb-ft
Page 2379
Component Location
Page 2380
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
2397
Description
2398
Waveform
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Inspection
System
Components Location
System > Page 2406
Component Location
System > Page 2407
Component Location
Emission Control System
Specifications

Specification
Specification

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Photo
Page 2416

Components Location
Page 2417
Component Location
Page 2418
Component Location
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
2435
Description
operating cycles.
Fuel System - Specifications
Specification

Fuel System - Specifications > Page 2440
Specification
Page 2441
Component Location
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
2458
Description
System
Specification
System > Page 2463
Specification

Component Location
> Page 2466

and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2483
Description
Specification
Specification

> Page 2489
Component Location
> Page 2490
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Page 2507
Description
Specification
Specification

> Page 2513
Component Location
> Page 2514
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Page 2531
Description
Engine Controls - P0300-P0306/O2 Sensor DTC Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Group FUEL SYSTEM
Number 10-FL-012
Date OCTOBER, 2010
DESCRIPTION:
rich shift.
Azera, and Veracruz
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
at Bank-1 only:

bank:
NOTE:

PARTS INFORMATION
System
Specification
System > Page 2541
Specification

Component Location
> Page 2544
> Page 2545
and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Description
Waveform
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations
Control System
Specification

Specification

2572
Component Location
2573
MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
c below.

Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
c below.

Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2595
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > A/T - Speed Sensor Identification/Application
Number 09-AT-010
Date JUNE, 2009

DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
PARTS INFORMATION
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER


Engine Control System
Specification
Engine Control System > Page 2623
Specification

Page 2624
Component Location
Page 2625
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Page 2642
Description
Specification

Specification
Component Location
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2666
Description
Control System
Specification

Specification

2672
Component Location
2673
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications
Specification

Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Location
Component Location
Page 2680
Page 2681

Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Description
Waveform
Specifications
Specification

Specification

7.8-11.8 N.m, 5.8-8.7 lb-ft
Component Location
Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Description
Waveform
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Component Information > Locations
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Page 2730
in the vehicle.

Page 2731

For example
Page 2732
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Page 2733
Symbols Part 1
Page 2734
Symbols Part 2
Page 2735
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
Page 2736
NOTE: -

Page 2737
be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
Page 2738
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
Page 2739
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

Page 2740
reading.

Page 2741
SHORT FINDER
Page 2742
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2743
Replacement
connector.

Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System
Specification
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System > Page
2748
Specification

Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Location
Component Location
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Location > Page 2751

Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Page 2754
in the vehicle.

Page 2755

For example
Page 2756
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Page 2757
Symbols Part 1
Page 2758
Symbols Part 2
Page 2759
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
Page 2760
NOTE: -

Page 2761
be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
Page 2762
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
Page 2763
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

Page 2764
reading.

Page 2765
SHORT FINDER
Page 2766
Page 2767
Circuit Diagram
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2768
Description
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure >
Fuel Pressure Test
Standard
Value.....................................................................................................................................374 ~
384 kpa (3.82 ~ 3.92 kgf/cm2, 54.3 ~ 55.8 psi)



Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System
Specification
Service Standard
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel
Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Test

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order >
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing >
Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations
Number One Cylinder

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Spark Plug
Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 2794
Specification
Spark Plugs
Spark Plug
Inspect Spark Plug
Standard :
Unleaded : 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.0394 - 0.0433 in.)

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check
> System Information > Specifications
Compression Check
Compression
pressure...............................................................................................................................1,225 kPa
(12.5 kgf/cm2, 177 psi) - 200 - 250 rpm
..............................1,078 kPa (11.0 kgf/cm2, 156 psi)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check
> System Information > Specifications > Page 2801
NOTE:
pressure.

1,078kPa (11.0kgf/cm2, 156psi)
the gasket.
surge tank.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance >
Valve Clearance
Valve Clearance

.......................................................................................20°C [68°F] Limit Intake................................
..............................................................................................................................................0.10 -
0.30 mm (0.0039 - 0.0118 in.) Exhaust................................................................................................
...........................................................................0.20 - 0.40 mm (0.0079 - 0.0157 in.)

.......................................................................................................................................0.17 - 0.23
mm (0.0067 - 0.0090 in.) Exhaust........................................................................................................
...................................................................0.27 - 0.33 mm (0.0106 - 0.0129 in.)
NOTE:
cover.

valve clearance.
clearance. )

value.

Exhaust : N = T + [A - 0.30mm (0.0118in.)]
3.600mm (0.1417in.)
(0.0067 - 0.0090in.) Exhaust : 0.27 - 0.33mm (0.0106 - 0.0129in.)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position
Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System
Specification
Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System > Page 2814
Specification

Component Location
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2819
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2833
Description
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Specifications > Fuel System - Specifications
Specification

Component Information > Specifications > Fuel System - Specifications > Page 2838
Specification
Component Location
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Description
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature
Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Fuel System - Specifications
Specification

Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Fuel System - Specifications > Page 2862
Specification
Component Location
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Description
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Door Control Module












Component Information > Description and Operation > Assist Door Module (ADM)
Description
control
Control Function
2. Timer function
Crash Unlock
Auto Door Lock
locked.
"UNLOCK"
Key Reminder

ignored.
Component Information > Description and Operation > Assist Door Module (ADM) > Page 2917
"3Km/h".
1. Memory operation
2. Replay operation
Fail Safe Function
Courtesy Lamp

ON by DDM, ADM.
Rescue Mode
not normal.

Description
lock and unlock.
Control Function
wires.
up/down functions.
door.
3. Timer function
Key Reminder
ignored.
switch operation.

1. Memory operation
2. Replay operation
"3Km/h" or more.
1. Memory operation
2. Replay operation

Fail Safe Function
IMS Switch
under "3Km/h"
Seat Manual Switch

Courtesy Lamp
communication.
ON by DDM,ADM.
Rescue Mode
not normal

Component Information > Service and Repair > Assist Door Module(ADM)
Replacement
Component Information > Service and Repair > Assist Door Module(ADM) > Page 2924
Replacement

Replacement
Replacement

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Specification

Component Information > Locations > Component Location
Component Location
Component Information > Locations > Component Location > Page 2932
Component Information > Locations > Component Location > Page 2933

Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Description
Waveform
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System
Specification
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System > Page 2956
Specification

Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2957
Component Location
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2960
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2974
Description
drivability.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Specification

Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 2979
Specification

7.8-11.8 N.m, 5.8-8.7 lb-ft
Component Location
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Description
Waveform
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Data Link Connector: Locations
Component Location
Data Link Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Data Link Connector: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Data Link Connector: Electrical Diagrams
Data Link Details (1)



Data Link Details Connector Pin Outs

Data Link Details Connector Pin Outs
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Specifications Engine Control System
Specification
[ETC Motor]
Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System > Page 3028
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Specifications Fuel System - Specifications
Specification
ETC Motor
- Specification
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Exploded Views
Components
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Electrical Diagrams
Schematic Diagram
Circuit Diagram
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Description and Operation
Description
ETC (Electronic Throttle Control) system is electronically controlled throttle device which controls
the throttle valve. It consists of ETC motor, throttle body and throttle position sensor (TPS). A
mechanical throttle control system receives a driver's intention via a wire cable between the
accelerator and the throttle valve, while this ETC system uses the signal from the Accelerator
Position Sensor (APS) installed on the accelerator pedal. After the PCM receives the APS signal
and calculates the throttle opening angle, it activates the throttle valve by using the ETC motor.
Additionally, it can handle cruise control function without any special devices.
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Testing and Inspection
Fail-safe Mode
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Location
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Connector [C01-1]
Connector [C01-2]
Connector [C01-1]
Connector [C01-2]
Circuit Diagram
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Inspection
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Emission Control System
Components Location
Component Information > Locations > Emission Control System > Page 3093
Component Location
Component Information > Locations > Emission Control System > Page 3094
Component Location
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Specifications > Emission Control System
Specifications

Component Information > Specifications > Emission Control System > Page 3099
Specification
Component Information > Specifications > Emission Control System > Page 3100
Specification

Component Information > Locations > Photo
Component Information > Locations > Photo > Page 3103
Components Location
Component Location
Component Location
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Description
operating cycles.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Specification
Specification

Information > Locations > Component Location
Component Location
Information > Locations > Component Location > Page 3130

Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Description
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations
Component Location
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3151
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum
Specification
Specification

Component Location
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Description
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For
ECM > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System
Specification
ECM > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System > Page 3180
Specification

ECM > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3181
Component Location
ECM > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3182
ECM > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
ECM > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3185
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
ECM > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3199
Description
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - P0300-P0306/O2 Sensor DTC Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Group FUEL SYSTEM
Number 10-FL-012
Date OCTOBER, 2010
DESCRIPTION:
rich shift.
Azera, and Veracruz
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
at Bank-1 only:
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - P0300-P0306/O2 Sensor DTC Diagnostics > Page 3204

bank:
NOTE:

PARTS INFORMATION
Specification
Specification

Component Location
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Description
Waveform
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Door Control Module












Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Assist
Door Module (ADM)
Description
control
Control Function
2. Timer function
Crash Unlock
Auto Door Lock
locked.
"UNLOCK"
Key Reminder
ignored.
"3Km/h".
1. Memory operation
2. Replay operation

Fail Safe Function
Courtesy Lamp

ON by DDM, ADM.
Rescue Mode
not normal.

Description
lock and unlock.
Control Function
wires.
up/down functions.
door.
3. Timer function
Key Reminder
ignored.
switch operation.

1. Memory operation
2. Replay operation
"3Km/h" or more.
1. Memory operation
2. Replay operation

Fail Safe Function
IMS Switch
under "3Km/h"
Seat Manual Switch

Courtesy Lamp
communication.
ON by DDM,ADM.
Rescue Mode
not normal

Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Assist Door
Module(ADM)
Replacement
Replacement

Replacement
Replacement

Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Component Location
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 3285
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Connector [C01-1]
Connector [C01-2]
Connector [C01-1]
Connector [C01-2]
Circuit Diagram
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3318
Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Component Location
Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3322
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches -
Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine
Control System
Specification
Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine
Specification

Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page
3329
Component Location
Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page
3330
Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3347
Description
Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Fuel System -
Specifications
Specification

Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Fuel System -
Specification
Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3353
Component Location
Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3354
Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3371
Description
Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications
Specification

Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Location
Component Location
> Page 3377
> Page 3378

Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3395
Description
Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3396
Waveform
Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information >
Specification
Specification

Component Location
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -

ERROR: undefined
STACK:
Circuit Diagram
Description
drivability.
Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical
Specifications
Specification

Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical
Specification

7.8-11.8 N.m, 5.8-8.7 lb-ft
Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3420
Component Location
Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3421
Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3438
Description
Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3439
Waveform
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Inspection
Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Emission Control System
Components Location
Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Emission Control System >
Page 3447
Component Location
Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Emission Control System >
Page 3448
Component Location
Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Emission
Control System
Specifications

Specification
Specification

Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Photo
Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Photo > Page 3457
Components Location
Component Location
Component Location
Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3476
Description
operating cycles.
Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Fuel System
- Specifications
Specification

Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Fuel System
- Specifications > Page 3481
Specification
Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3482
Component Location
Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3499
Description
Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System
Specification
Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System >
Page 3504
Specification

Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Location
Component Location
Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Location > Page
3507

Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3524
Description
Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine
Control System
Specification
Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine
Specification

Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page
3530
Component Location
Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page
3531
Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3548
Description
Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Specifications > Engine
Control System
Specification
Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Specifications > Engine
Specification

Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Specifications > Page
3554
Component Location
Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Specifications > Page
3555
Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3572
Description
Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine
Controls - P0300-P0306/O2 Sensor DTC Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Group FUEL SYSTEM
Number 10-FL-012
Date OCTOBER, 2010
DESCRIPTION:
rich shift.
Azera, and Veracruz
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
at Bank-1 only:
Controls - P0300-P0306/O2 Sensor DTC Diagnostics > Page 3577

bank:
NOTE:

PARTS INFORMATION
Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System
Specification
Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System >
Page 3582
Specification

Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Location
Component Location
Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Location > Page
3585
Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Location > Page
3586
Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3603
Description
Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3604
Waveform
Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations
Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control
System
Specification

Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control
System > Page 3612
Specification

Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3613
Component Location
Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3614
Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
c below.

Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL
ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N > Page 3632
Service Procedure
c below.

Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T -
Speed Sensor Identification/Application
Number 09-AT-010
Date JUNE, 2009

DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
PARTS INFORMATION
Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER


Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Specification

Specification

Component Location
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N > Page 3674
Service Procedure
c below.

Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N >
Page 3683
Service Procedure
c below.
Page 3684
Page 3685

Page 3686
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3687
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing
Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - CVVT Oil Control Valve Inspection
Inspection
Group ENGINE
Number 09-EM-002
Date MAY, 2009
DESCRIPTION:
confirmed.

Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - CVVT Oil Control Valve Inspection > Page 3692

IMPORTANT:
shown above.
NOTE:

is corrected.

Actuator > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System
Specification
Actuator > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System > Page 3697
Specification
- Specification
Actuator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3698
Component Location
Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3701
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Components
Circuit Diagram
Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > CVVT Oil Control Valve (OCV)
Description

Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > CVVT Oil Control Valve (OCV) > Page 3718
Timing) System
Description
Operation
retarded position.
Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > CVVT Oil Control Valve (OCV) > Page 3719
Solenoid > Component Information > Locations
Component Location
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Speed Sensor Identification/Application
Number 09-AT-010
Date JUNE, 2009

DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
PARTS INFORMATION
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER


Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Catalytic Converter: Locations
Components Location
Catalytic Converter: Service Precautions
Precautions For Catalytic Converter
CAUTION:
If a large amount of unburned gasoline flows into the converter, it may overheat and create a fire
hazard. To prevent this observe the following precations and explain them to your customer.
1. Use only unleaded gasoline. 2. Do not run the engine while the car is at rest for a long time.
Avoid running the engine at fast idle for more than 10minutes and idle speed for more
than 20 minutes.
3. Do not measure engine compression for an extended time. Engine compression tests must be
made as rapidly as possible. Remove the fuel pump
relay before performing a compression test.
4. Do not dispose of used catalytic converter together with parts contaminated with gasoline or oil.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Specifications
Canister Purge Control Valve: Specifications
Specification
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3755
Canister Purge Control Valve: Locations
Component Location
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Canister Purge Control Valve: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3758
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Canister Purge Control Valve: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Canister Purge Control Valve: Electrical Diagrams
Circuit Diagram
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3772
Canister Purge Control Valve: Description and Operation
Description
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV) is installed on the surge tank and controls the passage
between the canister and the intake manifold. It is a solenoid valve and is open when the PCM
grounds the valve control line. When the passage is open (PCSV ON), fuel vapors stored in the
canister is transferred to the intake manifold.
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3773
Canister Purge Control Valve: Testing and Inspection
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
Inspection
NOTE:
When disconnecting the vacuum hose, make an identification mark on it so that it can be
reconnected to its original position.
1. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the solenoid valve. 2. Detach the harness connector. 3.
Connect a vacuum pump to the nipple which is connected to intake manifold. 4. Apply vacuum and
check when voltage is applied to the PCSV and when the voltage is discontinued.
5. Measure the resistance between the terminals of the solenoid valve.
PCSV coil resistance(Ohms ): 19.0 - 22.0 [20°C (68°F)]

Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Specifications > Emission Control System
Canister Purge Solenoid: Specifications Emission Control System
Specifications
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
- Specification
Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Specifications > Emission Control System > Page 3778
Canister Purge Solenoid: Specifications Fuel System - Specifications
Specification
Actuators Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
- Type: Duty control type - Specification

Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Photo
Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Photo > Page 3781
Canister Purge Solenoid: Locations Emission Control System
Components Location
Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Photo > Page 3782
Canister Purge Solenoid: Locations Engine Control System
Component Location
Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair
Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair
Replace
1. Remove the rear left wheel house inner cover.
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A).
3. Remove the fuel tank air filter(B) with unscrewing the mounting bolts (C). 4. Install a new fuel
tank air filter and connect the canister close valve connector.
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Locations
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Locations
Components Location
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Locations > Page 3789
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
1. Look for loose connections, sharp bends or damage to the fuel vapor lines. 2. Look for distortion,
cracks or fuel damage. 3. After removing the canister, inspect for cracks, damage or saturated
canister.
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair
Removal
1. Remove the canister cover (A) with unscrewing the mounting bolts (B).
2. Disconnect the vacuum hoses(A,B,C).
3. Disconnect the canister close valve connector (A).
4. Unscrew the mounting bolts(A,B) and remove the canister.
Installation
Installation is in reverse order of removal.
Tightening torque :
1.7 - 2.6 kgf.m (16.7 - 25.5N.m, 12.3 - 18.8 lb-ft)
Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Specifications > Emission Control System
Leak Detection Valve: Specifications Emission Control System
Specifications
Canister Close Valve (CCV)
- Specification
Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Specifications > Emission Control System > Page
3797
Leak Detection Valve: Specifications Fuel System - Specifications
Specification
Canister Close Valve (CCV)
- Type: ON/OFF control type - Specification

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation >
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Specifications
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Specifications
Specifications
Tightening Torque
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3803
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Description and Operation
Operation
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
1. Remove the PCV valve. 2. Insert a thin stick(A) into the PCV valve(B) from the threaded side to
check that the plunger moves. 3. If the plunger does not move, the PCV valve is clogged. Clean it
or replace.
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Service and Repair
Removal
1. Remove the valve pad (A) and disconnect the vacuum hose (B).
2. Remove the PCV Valve.
Installation
Install the PCV valve and tighten to the specified torque.
PCV Valve installation:
7.8 - 11.8 N.m (0.8 - 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 - 8.7 lb-ft)

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System
Fuel Pressure Test
Standard
Value.....................................................................................................................................374 ~
384 kpa (3.82 ~ 3.92 kgf/cm2, 54.3 ~ 55.8 psi)



Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release >
System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Test

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System
Specification
Service Standard
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position
Specification
Specification

Component Location
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Description
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Specifications > Fuel System - Specifications
Specification

Component Information > Specifications > Fuel System - Specifications > Page 3847
Specification
Component Location
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Description
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Hyundai Fuel System Cleaner
Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Hyundai Fuel System Cleaner
Group: FUEL SYSTEM
Number: 10-FL-014
Date: NOVEMBER 2010
Model: ALL MODELS

Subject HYUNDAI FUEL SYSTEM CLEANER PLUS RECOMMENDATION AND FUEL QUALITY
INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION:
Hyundai Fuel System Cleaner Plus (P/N 00232-19047) is now the approved and recommended
service product for complete fuel system cleaning during routine service and preventative
maintenance.
NOTE:
^ A 20 ounce bottle treats up to 20 gallons of gasoline.
^ For use in all gasoline engines (MPI or GDI systems).
^ Can be used as often as 3,000 miles or at every oil change.
^ Cleans fuel injectors, intake valves, and combustion chambers.
^ Protects fuel level sending units against damage from sulfur content in fuel.
^ Cleans and protects critical fuel system components from corrosion.

Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Hyundai Fuel System Cleaner > Page 3871
^ Does not harm the emission system or leave behind combustion chamber deposits.
Regular use of Hyundai Fuel System Cleaner Plus with TECHRON(R) Technology can help
address engine carbon deposit related conditions. By removing these deposits, an engine may
experience restored engine performance and efficiency, smoother running idle, and cleaner tailpipe
emissions.
USAGE NOTES:
^ A single tank (up to 20 gallons) treated with a 20 ounce bottle is sufficient for cleaning in normal
cases. However; a second initial treatment on the next consecutive full tank may give additional
benefits for engines with heavier accumulated deposit formation.
^ The product can be used as often as every 3,000 miles to maintain optimum cleanliness and is
recommended to be used during every oil change as part of a preventative maintenance practice.
FUEL QUALITY INFORMATION:
Hyundai recommends the use of high-quality gasoline, including fuel advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline, as well as periodic use of an approved Fuel System Cleaner.
This is especially important for vehicles equipped with gasoline direct injection (GDI) engines with
advanced fuel delivery systems.
If use of poor quality gasoline is suspected, customer should be advised to refuel at a different
fueling station or switch to a different brand of fuel.
Poor quality gasoline may exhibit one or more of the following characteristics:
^ Abnormal color and odor
^ Undissolved water
^ Sediments and suspended foreign substance
^ Cloudy appearance and (after settling) showing signs of separation
NOTE:
Refer to TSB # 10-FL-013 for details related to fuel quality testing.
If use of gasoline with a low content of deposit control additives is suspected, then recommend to
the customer the exclusive use of high quality gasoline such as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
These products help to avoid the build-up of engine deposits and are available in all octane grades.
For latest information and list of retailers of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, please go to the official
website (www.toptiergas.com).
The use of the fuel system cleaner is a Customer Pay Item during time of routine maintenance and
the cost is not reimbursable under warranty.
Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Quality Testing
Group: FUEL SYSTEM
Number: 10-FL-013
Date: NOVEMBER 2010
Subject TESTING FUEL QUALITY TO DIAGNOSE ENGINE STARTABILITY / HESITATION /

DRIVEABILITY ISSUES
DESCRIPTION:
This bulletin outlines the basic components of the BG Fuel Test Kit and the procedure to test the
quality of the fuel during vehicle diagnosis.
Poor fuel quality may lead to cold engine startability issues, hesitation at idle or during acceleration,
and/or poor driveability. In addition, prolonged vehicle operation with poor quality fuel may result in
damage to the fuel system and formation of engine deposits.
The BG Fuel Test Kit can be used to determine the following aspects of the fuel:
^ Sediment / Water Contamination Inspection
^ Specific Gravity
^ Alcohol Content
^ ALL MODELS equipped with gasoline engines
PARTS INFORMATION:
The BG Fuel Test Kit (P/N J-48983) is the approved fuel quality testing tool to be used during
vehicle diagnosis. This kit is an essential tool that has been sent to all dealers and is part of the
new dealer kit.
Contents of the kit:
- Hydrometers (gasoline / diesel)
- Graduated cylinder (100ml)
- Graduated cylinder (alcohol test)
- Graduated cylinder small stopper
- Graduated cylinder holding fixtures
- Specific gravity vs. temperature reference chart. (shown below / right)

IMPORTANT:
The kit includes TWO (2) different hydrometers.
Do not use the diesel hydrometer with specific gravity range from 0.800 to 0.900.
Use only the gasoline hydrometer with specific gravity range from 0.700 to 0.800 for the correct
measurement of the fuel to be tested.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Prepare the tall graduated cylinder attached to the fixture base.
NOTE:
Be sure that the inside of the cylinder is clean and free of contaminants.
2. Obtain sample fuel from the incident vehicle and fill the graduated cylinder to the 100ml mark.
NOTE:
There are several different methods available to gather a small quantity of fuel for testing. Follow
the applicable Shop Manual procedures and precautions as required to perform any ONE of the
following, as feasible.
^ For older MPI fuel systems equipped with a fuel return line, divert the fuel return hose to capture
the fuel into a suitable container while running the engine at idle.
^ For MPI fuel systems that are returnless design, divert the fuel line from the fuel rail to capture
the fuel into a container. For additional fuel amount, briefly prime the fuel pump by cycling the
ignition key. (Do not perform this option for GDI engines.)
^ For GDI and MPI systems, lift the vehicle and disconnect the large fuel hose of the fuel filler neck
from the fuel tank inlet. Using a long socket extension, lightly push open the inlet check valve at the
inlet of the tank and capture the sample fuel.
^ For GDI and MPI systems, remove the main fuel pump and sender module from the fuel tank to
collect the fuel sample through the service access port, if possible. If equipped, removing the
remote fuel sender module may be easier for this task. Avoid fuel spillage.
3. Visually inspect the collected fuel sample for presence of sediment, debris, or water
contamination. (Example shown at right. Replace fuel if
contamination is found.)
4. Insert the thermometer into the graduated cylinder and attach the clip to the top rim.
5. Wait a few minutes to allow for the temperature to stabilize, then record the measured
temperature of the gasoline sample. Remove the thermometer
afterwards.
6. Insert the gasoline hydrometer with specific gravity range from 0.700 to 0.800 into the graduated
cylinder and wait until it stabilizes while floating in
the fuel.
7. Read the number at the liquid line on the side of the hydrometer.
8. Refer to the supplied reference chart to look up the measured temperature and the hydrometer
reading to find the corresponding specific gravity.
(Examples shown)
NOTE:
The fuel tanks of vehicles having contaminated fuel or fuel outside the NORMAL specific gravity
range should be drained and refilled.
9. Prepare the small graduated cylinder for fuel alcohol content testing.
NOTE:
Be sure that the inside of the cylinder is clean and free of contaminants.
10. With the stopper cap removed, add clean water up to the (A) water fill line.
11. Add fuel from the tall graduated cylinder to the (B) fuel fill line.
12. Insert the stopper cap at the top to seal it and vigorously shake the contents for at least 10
seconds or more.
13. Let the mixture settle for approximately 5~10 minutes.
NOTE:
At this point, any alcohol of the sample will combine with water and begin to separate from the fuel.
14. Read the line where it separates and find the corresponding (D) alcohol % level of the fuel
sample.
NOTE:
High alcohol content in the fuel can cause lean codes and other engine startability and driveability
conditions.
15. After completing the fuel tests, prepare the Fuel Test Kit for storage.
^ Rinse all pieces with window cleaner and water, then towel dry thoroughly.
^ Store the reference chart behind the protection foam.
^ Arrange all the components so that they are protected by the clamshell storage case.
When necessary, the use of the BG Fuel Test Kit as a part of the normal diagnostic troubleshooting
process may be covered under warranty.
However, if the root cause of the condition results from poor fuel quality, then some or all parts and
labor expenses may not be covered under warranty.
Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - E85 Fuel Usage Recommendations
Group: FUEL SYSTEM
Number: 08-FL-008
Date: AUGUST, 2008
Model: ALL MODELS
Subject: USE OF E85 BLENDED ETHANOL FUEL
DESCRIPTION:
E85 fuel is an alternative fuel composed of up to 85 percent ethanol and 15 percent gasoline, and
is manufactured exclusively for use in Flexible Fuel Vehicles. E85 is not compatible with current
Hyundai models. Use of E85 in Hyundai vehicles may result in poor engine performance or a hard
or no start condition, and damage to the vehicle's engine and fuel system.
Hyundai recommends that customers do not use fuel with an ethanol content exceeding 10
percent. Damage resulting from the use of E85 is not covered under Hyundai warranties.
VEHICLES AFFECTED: ^
This TSB applies to all Hyundai models
SERVICE TIP:
Sample fuel from incident vehicles can be tested with the Fuel Tester Kit (J-48983). Measurements
such as the alcohol % concentration and specific gravity can be made to determine if the
grade/type of fuel is correct.
Vehicle repair expenses caused by usage of E85 blended fuel are not eligible for warranty
reimbursement. Repair order must explain this clearly for customer pay work.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Filler Cap: Description and Operation
Description
A ratchet tightening device on the threaded fuel filler capreduces the chances of incorrect
installation, which wouldseal the fuel filler. After the gasket on the fuel filler cap and the filler neck
flange contact each other, the ratchet produces a loud clicking noise indicating the seal has been
set.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure
Release > System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Test

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Fuel Injector: Specifications Engine Control System
Specification
Fuel Injector: Specifications Fuel System - Specifications
Actuators Injector
- Number: 6 - Specification
Fuel Injector: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
Fuel Injector: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Fuel Injector: Electrical Diagrams
Circuit Diagram
Fuel Injector: Description and Operation
Description
Based on information from various sensors, the PCM measures the fuel injection amount. The fuel
injector is a solenoid-operated valve and the fuel injection amount is controlled by length of time
that the fuel injector is held open. The PCM controls each injector by grounding the control circuit.
When the PCM energizes the injector by grounding the control circuit, the circuit voltage should be
low (theoretically 0V) and the fuel is injected. When the PCM de-energizes the injector by opening
control circuit, the fuel injector is closed and circuit voltage should momentarily peak.
CAUTION:
If an injector connector is disconnected for more than 46 seconds while the engine runs, the PCM
will determine that the cylinder is misfiring and cut fuel supply. So be careful not to exceed 46
seconds. But the engine runs normally in 10 seconds after turning the ignition key off.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Regulator: Service and Repair
Removal(including Fuel Filter And Fuel Pressure Regulator)
1. Preparation
(1) Remove the 2nd seat(s) . (2) Remove the Service Cover (A).
(3) Disconnect the Fuel Pump Connector (A).
(4) Start the engine and wait until fuel in fuel line is exhausted. (5) After the engine stalls, turn the
ignition switch OFF.
2. After disconnecting the fuel feed quick connector (A), the fuel pump connector (B) and fuel tank
pressure sensor connector (C), remove the fuel
pump cover (D).
3. After removing the opening nut (A), remove the fuel pump from the fuel tank.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3912
Installation
1. Install the Fuel Pump assembly according to the reverse order of "REMOVAL" procedure.
Tightening torque: 2.0 - 2.9 N.m (0.2 - 0.3 kgf.m, 1.4 - 2.2 lb-ft)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure >
Fuel Pressure Test
Standard
Value.....................................................................................................................................374 ~
384 kpa (3.82 ~ 3.92 kgf/cm2, 54.3 ~ 55.8 psi)



Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay
Component Location
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
Fuel Gauge Sender
1. Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of sender connector (A)
at each float level.
2. Also check that the resistance changes smoothly when the float is moved from "E" to "F".
CAUTION: If the height resistance is not within specifications, replace the fuel sender as an
assembly. After completing this test, wipe the sender dry and reinstall it in the fuel tank.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations
Component Location
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3931
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Component Location
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3936
Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Component Location
Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3940
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control
System
Specification
Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control
System > Page 3946
Specification

Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3947
Component Location
Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3948
Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3965
Description
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Fuel System -
Specifications
Specification

Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Fuel System -
Specification
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3971
Component Location
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3972
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3989
Description
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System
Specification

Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System >
Page 3994
Specification

Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3995
Component Location
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3996
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Specification

Specification

Component Location
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System >
Variable Induction Control Actuator > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System
Variable Induction Control Actuator: Specifications Engine Control System
Specification
Variable Induction Control Actuator > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System > Page 4009
Variable Induction Control Actuator: Specifications Fuel System - Specifications
Specification
Actuators Variable Intake Solenoid (VIS) Valve
- Specification
Variable Induction Control Actuator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4010
Variable Induction Control Actuator: Locations
Component Location
Variable Induction Control Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Variable Induction Control Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Variable Induction Control Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page
4013
in the vehicle.

4014

For example
4015
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
4016
Symbols Part 1
4017
Symbols Part 2
4018
Variable Induction Control Actuator: Diagnostic Aids
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
4019
NOTE: -

4020
be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
4021
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
4022
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

4023
reading.

4024
SHORT FINDER
4025
4026
Variable Induction Control Actuator: Electrical Diagrams
Circuit Diagram
Variable Induction Control Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4027
Variable Induction Control Actuator: Description and Operation
Description
Variable Intake Solenoid (VIS) Valve is installed on the intake manifold and changes the effective
length of the intake passenger to improve intake efficiency under varying engine conditions.
1. Low/Middle Speed: VIS Valve Close -> Resonation Effect -> Improving Intake Efficiency 2. High
Speed: VIS Valve Open -> Improving Intake Inertia Effect -> Improving Intake Efficiency
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information >
Specifications
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder >
Number One Cylinder

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Specification

Component Location

Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Description
Waveform
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Specification

Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 4065
Specification

7.8-11.8 N.m, 5.8-8.7 lb-ft
Component Location
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Description
Waveform
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Specifications > Engine Electrical System
Ignition Coil: Specifications Engine Electrical System
Specification
Ignition System
Specifications > Engine Electrical System > Page 4090
Ignition Coil: Specifications Fuel System - Specifications
Ignition Coil
- Type: Stick type - Specification

Ignition Coil: Locations
Component Location
Ignition Coil: Testing and Inspection
INSPECT IGNITION COIL
1. Measure the primary coil resistance between terminals (+) and (-).
Standard value: 0.62Ohms ± 10%

Ignition Coil: Service and Repair
Removal
Ignition Coil
1. Remove the engine cover. 2. Disconnect the ignition coil connector(A).
3. Remove the ignition coil (B). 4. Installation is the reverse of removal.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information >
Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Specification
Specification

Locations > Component Location
Component Location
Locations > Component Location > Page 4104

Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Description
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications
Specification

Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Location
Component Location
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Location > Page 4132
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Location > Page 4133

Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4136
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4150
Description
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4151
Waveform
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Specification

Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 4156
Specification

7.8-11.8 N.m, 5.8-8.7 lb-ft
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4157
Component Location
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4158
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4161
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4175
Description
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4176
Waveform
Ignition Switch > Component Information > Locations
Ignition Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Ignition Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4182
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Ignition Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4195
Replacement
connector.

Knock Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System
Specification
Knock Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Engine Control System > Page 4200
Specification

Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Location
Component Location
Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Location > Page 4203

Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
Introduction
Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4206
in the vehicle.


For example
For example
junction block.
For example
Harness Layouts
Symbols Part 1
Symbols Part 2
NOTE:

horizontally.
Simulating Heat
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

be damaged.
below.
side to side.
shown in [FIG. 2].
shown in [FIG. 4].
Check Short Circuit
as shown below.
resistance.
shown in [FIG. 7].
5V circuits),

reading.

SHORT FINDER
Circuit Diagram
Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4220
Description
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Spark Plug
Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 4225
Specification
Spark Plugs
Spark Plug
Inspect Spark Plug
Standard :
Unleaded : 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.0394 - 0.0433 in.)

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids -
Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information >
Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids -
Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules -
Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information >
Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches -
Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations
Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul >
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
c below.

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: >
09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N > Page 4265
Service Procedure
c below.

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4269
Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-AT-016 > Aug > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh
Engagement
Engagement
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-016
Date AUGUST, 2009


P0720, P0721 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
conditions:

PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
^ Vehicle

^ "Current Data"
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-AT-016 > Aug > 09 > A/T
- MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-016
Date AUGUST, 2009


P0720, P0721 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
conditions:

- MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement > Page 4285
PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
^ Vehicle

^ "Current Data"
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-AT-010 > Jun > 09 > A/T
- Speed Sensor Identification/Application
Number 09-AT-010
Date JUNE, 2009
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
PARTS INFORMATION
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-AT-010 > Jun > 09 > A/T -
Speed Sensor Identification/Application
Number 09-AT-010
Date JUNE, 2009
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
PARTS INFORMATION
Locations > Output Speed Sensor
Locations > Output Speed Sensor > Page 4298
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids
- A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids
- A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Specified ATF and Additive Usage Information
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Specified ATF and Additive Usage Information
Group AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-006
Date: MARCH, 2009
Model ALL
Subject HYUNDAI SPECIFIED ATF AND ADDITIVE USAGE
DESCRIPTION:
Hyundai Motor Company approves of the use of only the ATF specified in the vehicle's owner's
manual. Use of other ATF may result in improper shift quality or other driveability issues.
Hyundai Motor Company does not approve of the use of any aftermarket ATF additives.
Hyundai Owner's Manuals state:
"Use only Hyundai Genuine ATF or other brands meeting the specification approved by Hyundai
Motor Company."
The approved ATF and the ATF level checking procedure are shown above.
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
NOTE:Check that the fluid level is at the HOT mark on the oil level gauge. If the fluid level is lower
than this, add more fluid until the level reaches the
HOT mark.
ATF ......................................................................................................................................................
............................................... 11.52 US qts (10.9 L)
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4322
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Type ....................................................................................................................... Hyundai Genuine

ATF SP-III, Diamond ATF SP-III, or SK ATF SP-III
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair
Service Adjustment Procedure
Automatic Transaxle Fluid Inspection
1. Drive the vehicle until the fluid reaches normal operating temperature [70 - 80°C(158 - 176°F)].
2. Place the vehicle on a level surface. 3. Move the selector lever through all gear positions. This
will fill the torque converter and the hydraulic system with fluid and move the selector
lever to the "N" (Neutral) or "P"(Park) position.
4. Before removing the oil level gauge, wipe all contaminants from around the oil level gauge. Then
take out the oil level gauge and check the
condition of the fluid.
NOTE: If the fluid smells as if it is burning, it means that the fluid has been contaminated by fine
particles from the bushes and friction materials, a transaxle overhaul may be necessary.
5. Check that the fluid level is at the HOT mark on the oil level gauge. If the fluid level is low, add
automatic transaxle fluid until the level reaches
the "HOT" mark.
Auto transaxle fluid: DIAMOND ATF SP-III, SK ATF SP-III Quantity : 10.9L (11.5 US qt.)
NOTE: Low fluid level can cause a variety of a abnormal conditions because it allows the pump to
take in air along with fluid. Air trapped in the hydraulic system forms bubbles, which are
compressable. Therefore, pressures will be erratic, causing delayed shifting ,slipping clutches and
brakes, etc. Improper filling can also raise fluid level too high. When the transaxle has too much
fluid, gears churn up foam and acuise the same conditions which occur with low fluid level,
resulting in accelerated deterioration of automatic transaxle fluid. In either case, air bubbles can
cause overheating, and fluid oxidation, which can interfere with normal valve, clutch, and brake
operation. Foaming can also result in fluid escaping from the transaxle vent where it may be
mistaken for a leak.
6. Insert the oil level gauge securely.
NOTE: When new, automatic transmission fluid should be red. The red dye is added so the
assembly plant can identify it as transmission fluid and distinguish it from engine oil or antifreeze.
The red dye, which is not an indicator of fluid quality, is not permanent. As the vehicle is driven the
transmission fluid will begin to look darker. The color may eventually appear light brown.
Replacement
If you have a fluid changer, use this changer to replace the fluid. If you do not, replace it using the
following procedure.
1. Disconnect the hose which connects the transmission and the oil cooler. 2. Start the engine and
let the fluid drain out.
Running conditions :"N" range with engine idling.
CAUTION: The engine should be stopped within one minute after it is started. If the fluid has all
drained out before then, the engine should be stopped at that point.
3. Remove the drain plug(A) from the bottom of the transmission case to drain the fluid.
4. Install the drain plug via the gasket, and tighten it to the specified torque.
Tightening torque : 40 - 50Nm (400 - 500 kgf.cm, 29 - 36 lb-ft)
5. Pour the new fluid in through the oil filler tube.
CAUTION: Stop pouring if the full volume of fluid cannot be poured in.
6. Repeat the procedure in step (2).
NOTE: Check the old fluid for contamination. If it has been contaminated, repeat the steps (5) and
(6).
7. Pour the new fluid in through the oil filler tube. 8. Reconnect the hose which was disconnected in
step (1) above and firmly replace the oil level gauge.(In case of this "replace", this means after
wiping off any dirt around the oil level gauge, insert it into the filler tube.)
9. Start the engine and run it at idle for 1 - 2 minutes.
10. Move the select lever through all positions, and then move it to the "N" position. 11. Drive the
vehicle until the fluid temperature rises to the normal temperature (70 - 80°C(158 - 176°F)), and
then check the fluid level again. The
fluid level must be at the HOT mark.
12. Firmly insert the oil level gauge into the oil filler tube.
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules -
A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches -
A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations
A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No
Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Start In P/N > Page 4341
Service Procedure
c below.

A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
c below.

A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4354
A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
09-AT-016 > Aug > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement
Engagement
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-016
Date AUGUST, 2009


P0720, P0721 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
conditions:

09-AT-016 > Aug > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement > Page 4363
PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
^ Vehicle

^ "Current Data"
09-AT-016 > Aug > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement > Page 4364
A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-AT-016 > Aug > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh
Engagement
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-016
Date AUGUST, 2009


P0720, P0721 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
conditions:

PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
^ Vehicle

^ "Current Data"
Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-AT-010 > Jun > 09 > A/T - Speed Sensor Identification/Application
Number 09-AT-010
Date JUNE, 2009

DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
PARTS INFORMATION
A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins
for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-AT-010 > Jun > 09 > A/T - Speed Sensor Identification/Application
Number 09-AT-010
Date JUNE, 2009

DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
PARTS INFORMATION
A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Speed Sensor
A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Speed Sensor > Page 4383
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations
Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement
Shifter A/T: Removal and Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the console upper cover(A). (see BD group).
2. Remove the front console cover (A). (see BD group).
3. Disconnect the connector (A) and ATM connector (B).
4. Remove the shift lever assembly mounting nuts (A).
5. Remove the shift cable mounting nut (A) and cap (B).
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 4401
Installation
1. Install the shift cable mounting nut (A) and cap (B).
Tightening torque : 10 - 14 Nm(100 - 140 kgf.cm, 7.3 - 10.2 lb-ft)
2. Install the shift lever assembly mounting nuts (A).
3. Connect the connector (A) and ATM connector (B).
4. Install the front console cover (A). (see BD group)

5. Install the console upper cover(A). (see BD group).

Shifter A/T: Overhaul
Disassembly
1. Remove the shift lever knob (A) by removing the two screws.
2. Disconnect the solenoid connector (A) and remove the indicator panel (B).
3. Remove the switch assembly (A) and 'P' position switch assembly.
4. Remove the solenoid (B) and solenoid lever (A).
5. Remove the lever assembly (B) by the mounting bolt (A).

6. Remove the lever (A) and tube (B) by removing the bolt (C).
Reassembly
1. Grease the tube (B) and install the lever (A) by tightening the bolt (C).
2. Install the lever assembly (B) by tightening the bolt (A).

3. Install the solenoid (B) and solenoid lever (A).
4. Install the switch assembly (A) and 'P' position switch assembly.
Tightening torque : 1.3 - 1.9 Nm(13 - 19 kgf.cm, 0.95 - 1.38 lb-ft)
5. Connect the solenoid connector (A) and install the indicator panel (B).
6. Install the shift lever knob (A) by tightening the two screws.

7. Install both sides of the brackets.

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
c below.

Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 4424
Service Procedure
c below.
Page 4425
Page 4426

Page 4427
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4428
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-AT-016 > Aug > 09 > A/T -
MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement
Engagement
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-016
Date AUGUST, 2009


P0720, P0721 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
conditions:

MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement > Page 4437
PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
^ Vehicle

^ "Current Data"
MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement > Page 4438
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission
Speed Sensor: > 09-AT-016 > Aug > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-016
Date AUGUST, 2009


P0720, P0721 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
conditions:

Speed Sensor: > 09-AT-016 > Aug > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement > Page 4444
PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
^ Vehicle

^ "Current Data"
Speed Sensor: > 09-AT-016 > Aug > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement > Page 4445
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed
Sensor: > 09-AT-010 > Jun > 09 > A/T - Speed Sensor Identification/Application
Number 09-AT-010
Date JUNE, 2009

DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
PARTS INFORMATION
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Speed Sensor
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Speed Sensor > Page 4457
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Wiring Harness, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiring Harness: > 09-AT-016 > Aug > 09 >
A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement
Wiring Harness: Customer Interest A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-016
Date AUGUST, 2009


P0720, P0721 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
conditions:

A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement > Page 4466
PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
^ Vehicle

^ "Current Data"
A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement > Page 4467
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-AT-016 >
Aug > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh
Engagement
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-016
Date AUGUST, 2009


P0720, P0721 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
conditions:

Aug > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement > Page 4473
PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
^ Vehicle

^ "Current Data"
Aug > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement > Page 4474
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Axle Shaft > Component Information > Specifications
Axle Shaft: Specifications
Specifications
NOTE:
Inner: On transaxle side
Outer : On tire side
Tightening Torque
Axle Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4480
Axle Shaft: Diagrams
Components
Components(UTJ-BJ Type)
Axle Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4481
Axle Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Axle Shaft: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Troubleshooting
Axle Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures > Page 4484
Axle Shaft: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Inspection
1. Check the driveshaft boots for damage and deterioration. 2. Check the ball joints for wear and
damage. 3. Check the splines for wear and damage.
Inspection(UTJ-BJ Type)
1. Check the driveshaft spline for wear or damage. 2. Check that there is no water or foreign
material in the BJ. 3. Check the spider assembly for roller rotation, wear or corrosion. 4. Check the
groove inside the UTJ case for wear or corrosion.
Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement
Axle Shaft: Removal and Replacement
Components
Components(UTJ-BJ Type)
Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 4487
Repair Procedures
Removal
1. Raise the vehicle and remove the wheel & tire assembly (A) from the front hub assembly (B).
Tightening torque Nm (Kgf.m, lb-ft): 90 - 110 (9.0 - 11.0, 65 - 80)
2. Loosen the drain plug and drain the ATF. 3. Unstake the driveshaft lock nut using a chisel and
hammer.
4. Remove the driveshaft lock nut (A).
5. Remove the split pin and castle nut form the tie rod end ball joint.
6. Disconnect the tie rod end (A) from the knuckle using a SST (09568-4A000).
7. Remove the split pin and lower arm bolt and nut (A).

8. Using a plastic hammer, disconnect the driveshaft (A) from the front hub assembly (B).
9. Removal of the driveshaft [RH].
A. Remove the heat protector (A).
B. Remove the inner shaft bearing bracket assembly mounting bolts (A).
Tightening torque Nm (Kgf.m, lb-ft): Gasoline: 50 - 65 (5.0 - 6.5, 36 - 47)
10. Insert pry bar (C) between the transaxle case (B) and driveshaft joint (A), separate driveshaft
from the transaxle.
CAUTION: -
Use a pry bar being careful not to damage the transaxle and joint.
- Do not insert a pry bar too deep, as this may cause damage to the oil seal.
- Do not pry on the driveshaft by excessive force it may cause components inside the joint kit to
dislodge resulting in a torn boot or a damaged bearing.
11. Pull out the driveshaft from the transaxle case.
CAUTION: -
Plug the hole of the transaxle case with the oil seal cap to prevent contamination.
- Replace the retainer ring whenever the driveshaft is removed from the transaxle case.
Installation
CAUTION:
- Replace the circlip with new ones before the installation.
- Before the installation, apply the gear oil on the driveshaft splines (A) and contacting surface of
differential case oil seal (B).
CAUTION: -
After installing the driveshaft joint to the transaxle case, be sure not to come out.
- The driveshaft lock nut should be replaced with new ones.
- After installation driveshaft lock nut, stake the lock nut using a chisel and hammer as shown in the
illustration below.
Axle Shaft: Overhaul
Disassembly(UTJ-BJ Type)
NOTE:
- Do not disassemble the BJ assembly.
- Special grease must be applied to the drive shaft joint. Do not substitute with another type of
grease.
- The boot band should be replaced with a new one.
1. Remove the clip (B) from drive shaft splines (A) of the transaxle side.
2. Remove both boot bands from the transaxle side UTJ case.
3. Pull out the boot from the transaxle side joint(UTJ). 4. When separating the joint and boot (A),
remove the grease from the UTJ case (B).
CAUTION: -
Be careful not to damage the boot.
- According to illustration below put alignment marks across spider roller assembly (A), UTJ case
(B), and shaft splines (C) to aid in reassembly.
5. Using a plier or flat-tipped (-) screwdriver, remove the snap ring (A).
6. Remove the spider assembly (B) from driveshaft (A) by using the Special Tool(09495-33000).
7. Clean the spider assembly. 8. Remove the boot (A), of the transaxle side joint(UTJ).
CAUTION: Wrap tape (B) around the driveshaft splines (C) to protect the boot (A).
9. Remove both bands on the side of wheel.
10. Pull out the joint(BJ) boot on the side of wheel into the transaxle direction.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the boot.
Reassembly(UTJ-BJ Type)
1. Wrap tape around the driveshaft splines (UTJ side) to prevent damage to the boots. 2. Apply
grease to the joint(BJ) boot on the side of wheel and install the boots. 3. Install the bands to both
boots.
4. Using clamp, secure the boot bands.
Clearance(A): 2.0 mm (0.079 in.) or less
5. Install the UTJ boot bands and UTJ boot. 6. Using the alignment marks(D) made during
disassembly as a guide, install the spider assembly(A) and snap ring(B) on the driveshaft
splines(C).
7. Add the specified grease to the joint(UTJ) boot as much as wiped away at inspection. 8. Install
the boots. 9. To control the air in the UTJ boot, keep the specified distance between the boot bands
when they are tightened.
Standard Value [L]
10. Install the boot bands by using the SST(09495-39100).

Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut >
Axle Nut: Specifications
AXLE NUT
Wheel Nut.............................................................................................................................................
....................90-110 N.m (9-11 kgf.m 65.1-79.5 lb.ft)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications
Flex Plate: Specifications
Drive Plate
Tightening
torque................................................................................................................................71.54 -
75.46 Nm (7.3 - 7.7 kgf.m, 52.80 - 55.69 lb-ft)
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays
and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
c below.

ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
c below.

Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest: > 09-AT-016 > Aug > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement
Engagement
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-016
Date AUGUST, 2009


P0720, P0721 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
conditions:

Customer Interest: > 09-AT-016 > Aug > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement > Page 4542
PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
^ Vehicle

^ "Current Data"
Customer Interest: > 09-AT-016 > Aug > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement > Page 4543
All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-AT-016 > Aug > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail
Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-016
Date AUGUST, 2009


P0720, P0721 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
conditions:

Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement > Page 4549
PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
^ Vehicle

^ "Current Data"
Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement > Page 4550
All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-AT-010 > Jun > 09 > A/T - Speed Sensor
Number 09-AT-010
Date JUNE, 2009
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
PARTS INFORMATION
All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-AT-010 > Jun > 09 > A/T - Speed Sensor
Number 09-AT-010
Date JUNE, 2009
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
PARTS INFORMATION
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Speed
Sensor
Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Speed
Sensor > Page 4562
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids -
Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information >
Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids -
Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules -
Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information >
Locations
Hyundai Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches -
Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
c below.

09-AT-013 > Jul > 09 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC's P0705/P0707/P0708/No Start In P/N
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-013
Date JULY, 2009

P0707, P0708
DESCRIPTION:
range switch.
PARTS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
c below.

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4603
Engagement
Engagement
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-016
Date AUGUST, 2009


P0720, P0721 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
conditions:

PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
^ Vehicle

^ "Current Data"
- MIL ON/DTC's Set/Fail Safe Mode/Harsh Engagement
Group TRANSAXLE
Number 09-AT-016
Date AUGUST, 2009


P0720, P0721 & P0722
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
conditions:

PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
^ Vehicle

^ "Current Data"
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 09-AT-010 > Jun > 09 > A/T
- Speed Sensor Identification/Application
Number 09-AT-010
Date JUNE, 2009
DESCRIPTION:
NOTE:
PARTS INFORMATION

Hyundai Entourage Workshop Manual (V6-3.8L (2009) )

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hyundai Entourage Workshop Manual (V6-3.8L (2009) )

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Factory Workshop Manual

Engine and year

Please navigate through the PDF using the options

This manual was submitted by

Alarm Module: Service and Repair

loosening the shear bolt.

4. Installation is the reverse of removal procedure.

Parking Assist Control Module: Locations

Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair Repair Procedures

Door Module: Locations Driver Door Module

4. Installation is the reverse of removal.

4. Installation is the reverse of removal.

Date: MARCH, 2009

Model: 2006 - 2008 ENTOURAGE

Subject: POWER SLIDING DOOR (PSD) CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT

1. Make sure both PSD's are closed.

2. Turn OFF the ignition key.

Date: MARCH, 2009

Model: 2006 - 2008 ENTOURAGE

Subject: POWER SLIDING DOOR (PSD) CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT

1. Make sure both PSD's are closed.

2. Turn OFF the ignition key.

Power Sliding Door Module: Service and Repair

Tightening torque : 0.025 - 0.035 N.m (0.0025 - 0.0035 kg.m)

4. Installation is the reverse of removal.

A learn cycle must be performed whenever the power is removed.

Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Service and Repair

Tightening torque : 0.025 - 0.035 N.m (0.0025 - 0.0035 kg.m)

6. Installation is the reverse of removal

Connect the connectors tightly.

- Check the power tail gate for normal operation correctly.

- A learn cycle must be performed whenever the power is removed.

Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair

4. Installation is the reverse of removal.

Electronic Brake Control Module: Specifications

Electronic Brake Control Module: Exploded Views

Electronic Brake Control Module: Connector Views

Sensor Output On Scan Tool(ABS)

ECU Connector Input/output(ABS)

ABS HECU Connector

Sensor Output On Scan Tool(ABS)

ESC HECU Connector Input / Output

Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Repair Procedures

3. Disconnect the connector(A) from the HECU.

Traction Control Module: Diagrams

Sensor Output On Scan Tool(ABS)

Blower Motor Relay: Locations

Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection

NO.13 in the A terminals. (Passenger compartment relay box)

the A terminals. (Passenger compartment relay box)

Blower Motor Relay: Service and Repair Repair Procedures

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Testing and Inspection

1. The daytime running unit (A) is integrated in the IPM.

5. Make these input tests at the connector by using ETM.

Relay Box: Specifications Relay Box (Passenger Compartment)

IPM (Instrument Panel Module)

Relay Box: Specifications Relay Box (Engine Compartment)

FAM (Front Area Module)

Relay Box: Diagram Information and Instructions

- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.

2. Connector configuration (components)

3. Connector configurations (connection between harnesses)